JP2022144367A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a performance in which a particular image is used.SOLUTION: Special performance execution means displays a particular corresponding image when a suggestive performance is executed, and executes a special performance in a mode in which the particular image acts on the particular corresponding image. A performance control CPU can execute a pseudo movable body display performance that moves and displays a first pseudo movable body display from a first initial display position to a first performance display position and can execute a movable body performance that moves a mounted movable body from an origin position to a performance position. In a variable display period of a symbol based on a variation pattern of a super ready-to-win β or a super ready-to-win γ, the ratio at which a game state is controlled to a big winning game state (big winning expectation) is higher when a development performance A using the mounted movable body and a development performance B using a second pseudo movable body display are executed than that when the development performance A is not executed and the development performance B is executed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8-15

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state for a player.

As shown in Patent Document 1, as a gaming machine, a shooting device shoots game balls, which are game media, into a game area. prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying (also referred to as “fluctuation”) identification information is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device is a specific display result, the game state (game There is a so-called pachinko machine configured to change the state of the machine (ie, more specifically, the state in which the game machine is controlled) to give a predetermined game value to the player. As shown in Patent Document 3, by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable object display, there is a device that enables execution of an effect similar to the effect of moving a movable body as a structure (for example, Patent Document 3 reference).

The game value is defined as the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine that is advantageous to the player who is likely to win the ball, or the state that is advantageous to the player. It is to generate a right or to be in a state in which the conditions for paying out prize balls are likely to be established.

In a pachinko game machine, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display of special symbols (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the winning of a game ball in a starting winning hole. If you do, a "jackpot" will occur. It should be noted that the derivation display means that the symbol (final stop symbol) is finally stopped and displayed. When a big win occurs, for example, the big win opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big win game state in which the ball is likely to win. Then, in each open period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the large winning openings are won, the large winning opening is closed. The number of openings of the big winning opening is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 15 rounds). An opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the big winning opening is closed after the opening time has elapsed. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big winning slot may be called a round. Moreover, the game in a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in the variable display device, patterns other than the final stop pattern (for example, the middle pattern among the left, middle, and right patterns) continue for a predetermined period of time and are stopped and shaken in a state in which they match a specific display result. Big wins can occur before the final result is displayed due to moving, scaling, or deformation, multiple symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols changing. The production performed in the state where the sexuality is continuing (hereinafter, these states are referred to as the reach state) is called the reach production. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In such a game machine, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of suggestive effects that are controlled in an advantageous state and that have different expectations depending on the mode of effect, and expect the suggestive effects using the displayed special images. There are some that change to a high performance mode. For example, Patent Literature 1 describes that a pseudo consecutive notice effect, a development destination notice effect, or an active suspension notice effect is executed by a present image displayed by opening a present box of the same mode. Further, for example, in Patent Document 2, by displaying information on the stock of accessories on the screen, it is possible to inform the player that an effect in which the movable body falls will be executed later as a strong advance notice effect. Have been described.

JP 2015-134097 A Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-50980 JP 2019-92949 A

However, there is still room for improving the marketability of the game machines having the functions and configurations of Patent Documents 1-3.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
In addition to suggesting that it will be controlled to an advantageous state, there are multiple types of suggestion effects with different expectations depending on the mode of presentation (for example, a title display is displayed in a predetermined mode, and an active display is displayed in a predetermined mode). Suggestive effect execution means capable of executing production, dialogue production that displays dialogue display in a predetermined mode, decorative pattern production that displays decorative patterns in a predetermined mode, etc.);
By using a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12) and the displayed special image, a suggestive effect executed in one effect mode is displayed. a special effect executing means capable of executing a special effect of changing the one effect mode to a more expected effect mode (for example, a chance-up effect of changing the display color of the active display from normal color (white) to blue). When,
display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo-movable object display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a pseudo-moving object display performance for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving object display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable object effect is not executed in the predetermined period. The proportion of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11) while the suggestive effect is being executed, and the special effect executing means displays the special corresponding image in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. Execute a special effect (for example, display a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH or decoration pattern, and execute a chance-up effect in such a manner that the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is stuck with the key image 030IWG12. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.).
According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest. Furthermore, the player can be made to pay attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect are executed, thereby improving interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the big-hit determination table in characteristic part 030IW, and a variation pattern table. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a configuration of a variation pattern and a breakdown of variation time; It is a timing chart showing the execution timing of each effect during the super reach. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution time of each production|presentation in a super reach first half part and a second half part. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stock effect pattern determination table; It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a chance up production|presentation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a title display change pattern determination table, an active display change pattern determination table, a dialogue display change pattern determination table, and a decoration symbol change pattern determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of stock effect; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing another specific example of stock effect; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the first half and second half of super reach. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a chance-up effect for active display; It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the chance up production|presentation which targets a decorative pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of chance up fanning production (false). FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (suggestion) image and a keyhole (substantial) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect; It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is a figure which shows the numerical range of a jackpot in the variable display of the 1st special figure in a normal state or a time saving state, and the numerical range of loss with a time saving. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic portion 241SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine as the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating an effect control command. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number; (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various effects in normal reach and super reach. It is a figure for demonstrating the content and structure of various effects in a super reach. It is a figure which shows the big-hit expectation degree according to the execution status of the development production|presentation A and the development production|presentation B. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of the pachinko game machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the display of the first pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the display of the second pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a movable range of the mounting movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-moving object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-moving object display. 9 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing; 9 is a flow chart showing an announcement effect type determination process; (A) is a table for determining the type of advance notice effect A, and (B) is a table for determining the type of notice effect B. FIG. (A) is a flowchart showing development effect A type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect A type determination table. (A) is a flow chart showing development suggestive effect type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a development suggestive effect type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing development effect B type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a development effect B type determination table. (A) is a flowchart showing a decision effect type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a decision effect type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation of super reach β mainly in normal reach. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing an example of effect operation in weak super reach. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of effect operation in the same weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing an example of an effect operation in strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the strong super ready-to-win effect. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after notification of the confirmation of a big hit. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable object display. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a light emission display part and mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable object display and a mounted movable object; It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. It is similarly an explanatory view for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the mounted movable body. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo-moving object display and the second pseudo-moving object display; (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a modified example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a modified example 2 of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a modified example 3 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big winning symbol or the small winning symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data for progressing the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), but also the states of backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is ended.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 030IW)
Next, the characterizing portion 030IW of this embodiment will be described.

(jackpot determination table)
FIG. 8-1 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a big hit determination table and a variation pattern table. Among them, FIG. 8-1(A) is an example of a big hit determination table used in the characteristic portion 030IW. As shown in FIG. 8-1(A), in this example, based on the hit determination random number, it is determined that the jackpot will be awarded with a probability of about 1/300 in the low probability state, and about 1/300 in the high probability state. It is determined to be a big hit with a probability of 1/30.

In addition, not limited to the configuration shown in FIG. 8-1 (A), for example, depending on whether it is the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol or the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol , may have different jackpot probabilities.

Further, for example, it is configured to be able to set to one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. If it is possible to check the set value of or change the set value, the big hit probability may differ depending on which set value is set.

Also, a plurality of jackpot types may be provided, each having a different advantage. Specifically, according to the jackpot type, the number of rounds in the jackpot game and the game state after the jackpot game may differ. In this case, when it is determined to be a big win based on the random number for winning determination, the type of the big win is determined based on the random number for determining the type.

(Variation pattern table)
FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern table in the characteristic portion 030IW. Among them, FIG. 8-1(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for loss. Also, FIG. 8-1(C) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for big wins. The variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 8-1(B) and (C) are both used in the low-probability state. A variation pattern table (not shown) having different ratios of determination values may be used in the high-probability state and the high-base state.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (B), in the case of deviation, the variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2 -1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach A), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PA2-5 ( Super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. 8-1 (C), in the case of a big hit, the variation pattern is a variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), a variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach A), a variation pattern PB2-3 (super reach B), variation pattern PB2-4 (super reach A (with chance up)) and variation pattern PB2-5 (super reach B (with chance up)) is determined.

In this example, during the super reach after the reach is established, the stock effect of stocking the item (key in this example) and the effect of another effect using the stocked item (key) are changed (that is, the other effect It is configured to be able to execute a chance-up effect that increases the expectation of a big hit suggested by With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest during the super reach, and to increase the expectation for the stock effect and the chance-up effect. Hereinafter, executing the chance-up effect using the stocked item (key) is also referred to as releasing the stocked item (key).

In this example, super ready-to-win is a series of performances unfolded after ready-to-win is established. When the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-2, PA2-3, PB2-2, and PB2-3 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) are not executed, during the super reach, the outpost of the battle effect. There are two parts, namely, a super ready-to-win first half part A in which a prelude effect is executed, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. Further, when the effect control is performed based on the variation patterns PA2-4, PA2-5, PB2-4, PB2-5 in which the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) is executed, the stock effect is executed during the super reach. There are three parts: a super ready-to-win introduction part in which is executed, a super ready-to-win first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed together with a sentry effect, and a super ready-to-win second half part in which a battle effect is executed. With such a configuration, during the period before the start of the battle production where the excitement of Super Reach reaches its climax, the stock production and the chance-up production are executed, so it is possible to gradually increase the production and enhance the production effect. can.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-1 (B) and (C), the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is executed is the super reach in which the chance-up effect (and stock effect) is not executed. The degree of expectation for big hit is higher than that of reach, and the degree of expectation for big hit is higher in super reach B than in super reach A. - 特許庁With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the chance-up effect (and the stock effect) will be executed and in which super reach it will be executed.

In addition to the example shown in FIG. 8-1, for example, a variation pattern is provided in which a pseudo-continuous effect is performed once or more times before the super reach, and the degree of expectation for a big hit differs according to the number of times of the pseudo-continuous effect. You may do so.

Next, the configuration of each variation pattern will be described. FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the variation pattern and the breakdown of the variation time. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the elements that make up the variation pattern (which can be said to be an effect executed in the variation pattern) are "normal variation" that performs variable display in a normal manner, and ``Shortened variation'' that performs variable display in a shortened manner, ``Normal reach'' that performs normal reach as a reach effect, and ``Super reach introduction (stock effect)'' that performs a stock effect in the super reach introduction part as a reach effect, "Super reach first half A (no chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part A has a forward appearance, and "super reach first half B (with chance-up effect)" in which super reach first half part B performs a guard effect and chance up effect. And, there is a "super reach second half (battle production)" in which the battle production is performed in the second half of the super reach, and a "blessing production at the time of winning" in which a blessing production is performed to celebrate the big hit. It should be noted that the example shown in FIG. 8B is not the only example, and other elements such as an element that performs a pseudo continuous effect may be provided.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 is a fluctuation pattern that is not normal fluctuation, and includes "normal fluctuation" (15 seconds) as an element constituting the fluctuation pattern, and the total fluctuation time is 15 seconds. In addition, the variation pattern PA1-2 is a variation pattern that will not be shortened variation, includes "shortened variation" (5 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 5 seconds.

Also, the variation pattern PA2-1 is a variation pattern that is lost after normal reach, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) as an element constituting the variation pattern, and the total variation time is 20 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 are variation patterns that are lost after passing through the super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and the super reach second half part, and the elements constituting the variation pattern are " The total variable time is 70 seconds including the first half of super reach A (no chance-up effect)” (30 seconds) and the second half of super reach (battle effect)” (40 seconds).

In addition, the variation patterns PA2-4 and PA2-5 are variation patterns that are lost through the super reach introduction part, the super reach first half part B in which the chance-up effect is executed, and the super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds), and the total variation time is 110 seconds.

In addition, the variation pattern PB2-1 is a variation pattern that changes from normal reach to a big hit, and includes "normal reach" (20 seconds) and "blessing effect at the time of winning" (20 seconds) as elements constituting the variation pattern. The variation time is 40 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-2 and PB2-3 are variation patterns that become a big hit after going through a super reach first half part A in which the chance-up effect is not executed and a super reach second half part. Total variable time including super reach first half A (no chance up effect)” (30 seconds), “super reach second half (battle effect)” (40 seconds), and “blessing effect when winning” (20 seconds) is 90 seconds.

In addition, the variation patterns PB2-4 and PB2-5 are variation patterns that result in a big hit after passing through a super reach introduction part, a super reach first half part B in which a chance-up effect is executed, and a super reach second half part. The elements that make up the pattern are "super reach introduction (stock production)" (30 seconds), "super reach first half B (with chance up production)" (40 seconds), and "super reach second half (battle production)" (40 seconds). seconds) and the “blessing effect at the time of winning” (20 seconds), and the total variable time is 130 seconds.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-2, the super reach A and the super reach B have the same performance time for the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. The rendering time may be different depending on the type.

(Execution timing of each production during Super Reach)
Next, the execution timing of the stock effect and the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-3 is a timing chart showing an example of execution timing of each effect.

In this example, the variation time (that is, the total performance execution time) is determined by the variation pattern determined on the main board 11 side, and the performance control board 12 side determines the stock performance and the chance-up performance execution timing based on the variation pattern. Or, the performance execution time is determined. However, although the details will be described later, depending on the type of effect, the execution timing may be predetermined corresponding to the variation pattern. In addition, not limited to the configuration of this example, a variation pattern in which the performance timing and the performance execution time of the stock effect and the chance up effect are predetermined is provided, and the main board 11 side determines one of the variation patterns. may

FIG. 8-3(A) shows a case where super reach without chance up is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 8-3(A), the outpost effect is executed in the first half part A of super reach, and the battle effect is executed in the second half part of super reach.

FIG. 8-3(B) shows a case where super reach with chance up is executed. In this case, the stock effect is first executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the super ready-to-win first half part B, the chance-up effect is executed together with the outpost effect. Then, the battle effect is executed in the second half of the super reach.

As shown in FIG. 8-3(B), in this example, at maximum three timings of timings A to C during the stock effect (timings (A) to (C) shown in FIG. 8-3(B)) There is an opportunity to stock items (keys). In this example, a maximum of 3 timings are provided as opportunities to stock items (keys) in the stock effect, but the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. There may be.

Also, in this example, in the first half of Super Reach, the title display (effect to display the title display), the active display (effect to display the active display), the dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), and the decoration pattern ( The "decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern" means that the degree of expectation for a big hit indicated by each effect mode differs, and when the corresponding chance-up effect is executed, the mode of effect changes (that is, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested increases). is configured as

Specifically, when one item (key) is stocked in the stock effect, title display (effect to display title display), active display (effect to display active display), dialogue display (effect to display dialogue) A chance-up effect targeting either the dialogue effect to be displayed) or a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed once, and two items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect. , Title display (effect to display the title display), active display (effect to display the active display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display), decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of the two targets, and when three items (keys) are stocked in the stock effect, the title display (effect to display the title display), active display (display active display) A chance-up effect is executed once for each of three of 3 of the following: a line display (a line effect of displaying a line display), and a decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying a decorative pattern). Note that the configuration is not limited to this example, and the chance-up effect may be executed a plurality of times for one effect. In this case, the stocked items (keys) are released each time the chance-up effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), in this example, the first to fifth timings ((1) shown in FIG. 8-3 (B)) are the timings at which the chance-up effect can be executed in the first half of the super reach. to (5)) are provided. In this example, the first to fifth timings in the first half of Super Reach are determined for each variation pattern (or each type of Super Reach), but are common to any variation pattern (or type of Super Reach). may be the timing of

Also, in this example, as shown in FIG. ) can be executed at the second timing or the fourth timing, and the chance-up effect for dialogue display (dialogue production to display dialogue display) can be executed at the third timing , and the chance-up effect for decorative symbols (decorative symbol effect for displaying decorative symbols) is configured to be executable at the fifth timing.

At which of the second timing and the fourth timing the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is to be executed is determined by a lottery. On the other hand, the timing at which the chance-up effect for title display (effect to display the title display), dialogue display (effect to display the dialogue display) or decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect to display the decorative pattern) is executed is fixedly determined for each variation pattern. It should be noted that, without being limited to such a configuration, the timing at which the chance-up effect for the active display (the effect for displaying the active display) is executed may be fixedly determined, or the title display may be performed. (Direction to display title display), Dialogue display (Direction to display dialogue display) or Decorative pattern (Decorative pattern effect to display decorative pattern) Either one of them may be determined by lottery.

Note that the execution order of the effects that are targets of the chance-up effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-3, and may be another order. However, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be improved by the chance-up performance (for example, the degree of expectation for a big win is likely to be changed to a performance mode with a high degree of expectation for a big win) as the order of targets for the chance-up performance becomes later. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, in this example, when the chance-up effect is executed during the super reach, the stock effect is always executed. There may also be a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without the game. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a variation pattern including a stock effect and a chance-up effect and a variation pattern including a chance-up effect without a stock effect are provided in advance, and the former is provided on the main board 11 side. When the variation pattern is determined, the performance control board 12 side determines the performance contents of the stock performance and the chance-up performance according to the modes shown in FIGS. When the board 11 side determines the latter variation pattern, the performance control board 12 side determines whether or not to execute the chance-up performance and the type of the chance-up performance to be executed based on the determined variation pattern. In this way, by providing a pattern in which the chance-up effect is executed without executing the stock effect, the presence of the chance-up effect increases, and it is visualized that the chance-up effect will be executed in the future. The player can enjoy the performance while having a sense of superiority in the situation. Furthermore, in such a case, if the stock effect is executed in advance, the ratio of executing many chance-up effects is higher than when it is not executed (that is, the chance-up effect increases the expectation of a big hit. It may be configured so that it is likely to be high), the execution of the stock effect may be prioritized, and the execution of the stock effect may be expected.

In addition, in this example, the first half of super reach and the second half of super reach are always present in super reach, but the configuration is not limited to this. By omitting it, the super reach introduction part may be followed by the super reach second half part, and the chance-up effect may be performed in the second half part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the total effect execution time of reach with a high degree of expectation from becoming too long.

In addition, when setting an exception pattern that omits the first half of Super Reach, in the basic pattern that is not omitted as a premise, when developing from the first half of Super Reach to the second half of Super Reach, the boundary between the first half and the second half is related to Super Reach. It is desirable that another effect image is displayed in such a manner as to completely cover the effect image, or that the effect contents are clearly divided between the first half and the latter half. For example, at the boundary between the first half and the second half, an effect image or character related to the chance-up effect shown in FIG. may be displayed in such a manner as to cover all of them. Further, for example, the production contents may be divided such that the outpost production is executed in the first half part and the battle production is executed in the second half part, or the battle scene is displayed in the first half part and the character performs a special move in the second half part. The content of the presentation may be divided by displaying a final scene such as a draw. By doing so, even when the super reach first half part is omitted, it is possible to make the flow of production feel natural.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-3, for the sake of convenience, the intervals between the stock timing and the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed are uniform. OK.

(Execution time of each production in Super Reach)
Next, the execution time of each effect in Super Reach will be described. FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution time of each effect in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach.

Of the examples shown in FIG. 8-4, FIG. 8-4 (A) shows the title display (title display is displayed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach (the timing of (1) shown in FIG. 8-4) effect) is executed, and a chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect that displays dialogue display) at the third timing (timing (3) shown in FIG. 8-4). Then, at the fifth timing (timing of (5) shown in FIG. 8-4), an example of executing a chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) (of the chance-up effect to be described later) corresponding to the eighth effect pattern) is shown.

In addition, in FIG. 8-4 (B), the chance-up effect for the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed at the first timing of the first half of the super reach, and the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) is executed at the fifth timing. An example (corresponding to the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect to be described later) in which the chance-up effect is executed for the decoration symbol effect displaying the pattern is shown.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 8-4, in the second half of Super Reach, a movable body effect is performed in which the movable body 32 moves before the end of variation (for example, when notifying that the game will be controlled for a big win).

In this example, there are two cases: a case where the dialogue effect without the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4A is executed, and a case where the dialogue effect with the chance-up effect shown in FIG. 8-4B is executed. , the performance to be the target of the chance-up performance is configured such that when the performance mode changes due to the chance-up performance, the execution time is longer than when the chance-up performance does not change the performance mode. there is Specifically, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). With such a configuration, when the chance-up performance is executed, a period for executing the chance-up performance and its target performance (for example, a period for notifying the change and the performance mode after the change) is ensured. be able to.

In addition, if the effect execution time of the effect is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up effect, the execution timing of other effects will be affected, so the amount of data related to effect control will increase and the processing will become complicated. There is a risk. Moreover, since the variable time (that is, the total performance execution time) is fixedly fixed in advance for each variation pattern, there is a possibility that the performance will not be completed within the time or that the time will be left over. Therefore, in this example, by varying the execution period of the movable body presentation depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up presentation, the influence on other presentations is suppressed, and all presentations are made to fit within the time period without discomfort.

That is, in this example, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. 8-4(A) is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect shown in FIG. The effect execution time T21 of the movable body effect shown in 4(A) is shorter than the effect execution time T12 of the movable body effect shown in FIG. 8-4(B). And, the effect execution time of the chance-up effect for the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) is common.

As the movable body effect, for example, the movable body 32 is moved from the initial position to the effect position in front of the display area of the image display device 5 and is controlled to be positioned at the effect position for a predetermined period, and the image display device is displayed during the predetermined period. 5, control is performed to display an effect image or the like so as to emphasize the movable body production (at this time, the movable body 32 itself may move at the production position). When performing control to move to a position, the rendering execution time of the movable body rendering can be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the period during which the movable body 32 is positioned at the rendering position. By adjusting the effect execution time of the movable body effect in this way, it is possible to cope with minute changes in the effect time depending on whether or not there is a chance up. With such a configuration, the production execution time of the production is changed depending on the presence or absence of the chance-up production, while preventing an increase in the amount of data related to the production control and complication of the processing, and making all the productions uncomfortable. can be completed within the time frame.

Note that the adjustment of the performance time may be performed by, for example, a performance other than the movable body performance. For example, if the variable display result is a loss and the movable object effect is not executed before the end of the variation, after the effect image related to super reach is restored to the normal background image before the end of the change, a decorative pattern indicating the loss is displayed. may be adjusted by lengthening or shortening the time for which the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, in this example, the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, and the execution time is varied according to the chance-up effect to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-4(A), the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a longer execution time than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. Although the details will be described later, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns has a higher chance of winning than the chance-up effect for title display and dialogue display. can increase With such a configuration, various chance-up effects can be executed in a suitable execution time, and the effects of the effects can be enhanced.

Also, in this example, when one chance-up effect targeting one effect is being executed, another chance-up effect targeting another effect is not executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, the chance-up effect with different targets is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the chance-up effect being executed.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-5 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step 030IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the display result (stop symbol) is determined (step 030IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 030IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the decoration pattern is stopped) A display result determining means for determining the pattern) is realized. Incidentally, when a pseudo-run is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120, in step 030IWS802, sets a chance symbol (for example, like "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-run. , A combination of a jackpot pattern that does not become a reach and a pattern that is shifted by one pattern, or a combination of patterns in which the medium pattern is a special pattern exclusively for pseudo-ren (characters such as "NEXT" are written and numbers are written) It also decides what is not possible to constitute a jackpot combination). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data indicating the stop symbol of the determined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 030IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the decorative symbols to be stopped based on only the variation pattern command. .

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decoration patterns other than the above is determined. However, when the ready-to-win effect is involved, a combination of decorative patterns in which the left and right two patterns are aligned is determined. In addition, even if it is lost, in the case of "time saving lost", a combination of decorative symbols of the lost symbols including special symbols (for example, star symbols) is determined. It should be noted that it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missing symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and diamond-shaped symbols) according to the time-saving type.

The effect control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not it is a variation pattern including super reach (with chance up) (step 030IWS803). Then, if the variation pattern does not include super reach (with chance up), the process proceeds to step 030IWS811.

If the variation pattern includes super reach (with chance up), the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the stock effect (step 030IWS804). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect pattern of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS805). Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines the effect mode after changing the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (step 030IWS806). After that, the process moves to step 030IWS811. The details of steps 030IWS804, S805 and S806 will be described later.

At step 030IWS811, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the contents of the variation pattern and the determined effect (step 030IWS811).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 030IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices (parts for effect) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. In addition, the process timer set value is set with a variable time in the mode of variation. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table, and performs control to display the decoration pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value. Also, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80 . Also, the process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, in the process table used when performing the effect control for the variation pattern involving the ready-to-win effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has passed. Process data indicating to display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the simulated run and the sliding effect. may

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the production device (the image display device 5 as the production component, the production component as the Various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts are controlled (step 030IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

By executing the process of step 030 IWS813, an effect corresponding to the variation pattern and the content determined to be executed is realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 030IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172) (step 030IWS815).

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the stock effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS804) will be described.

At step 030 IWS804, for example, the stock effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, when the variation pattern is super reach A (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-4, PB2-4, the first stock effect pattern determination table (super reach A) shown in FIG. By referring to it, one of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked as the effect result and the second to third effect patterns in which two items (keys) are stocked as the effect result is determined.

Further, when the variation pattern is super reach B (with chance up) variation pattern PA2-5, PB2-5, refer to the second stock effect pattern determination table (super reach B) shown in FIG. 8-6(B). , 1st production pattern to stock 1 item (key) as a production result, 2nd to 3rd production patterns to stock 2 items (keys) as a production result, 3 items (keys) to be stocked as a production result. Any one of the fourth to fifth production patterns is determined.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-3 and 8-6, there are opportunities to stock items (keys) at timing A, timing B, and timing C during the stock effect. For example, in the first effect pattern, At timing A, one item (key) is stocked, and at timings B and C, no item (key) is stocked. For example, in the fifth effect pattern, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. Thus, in this example, an opportunity to stock one or more items (keys) is provided at each timing.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) and 8-6(B), each effect pattern of the stock effect is configured so that the proportion determined at the time of the big win is different. That is, it is configured such that the degree of expectation for a big hit differs depending on the number of stocked items (keys) and the timing of stocking. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the stock effect.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6(A) to (B), the super reach A and the super reach B are configured so that the effect pattern of the stock effect that can be determined is different. Specifically, at super reach A, a maximum of two items (keys) can be stocked, and at super reach B, a maximum of three items (keys) can be stocked. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to which type of super reach the stock effect is executed.

Also, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to (B), the item (key) is stocked at timing A (in other words, the stock effect is executed) regardless of the effect pattern. It is configured so that at least one item (key) is stocked when the With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having no expectations for the stock performance or not paying attention to the stock performance due to the case where the items are not stocked even if the stock performance is executed. be able to.

In this example, since the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the stock effect is executed than when the stock effect is not executed, the player expects the occurrence of the stock effect. Therefore, for example, in the normal reach before the start of the super reach (the state in which the left and right patterns are tense and the middle pattern is fluctuating in the image display device 5), an effect suggesting that the stock effect will be executed, and the execution You may make it perform the production|presentation which stirs whether it is done or not. For example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal reach state, a special symbol such as a "key stock time symbol" as a medium symbol may be stopped to shift to the stock effect. Also, for example, when the stock effect is executed, in the normal ready-to-win state, the medium pattern starts to fluctuate at high speed, and after the screen is changed to the super ready-to-win (white out or the like to cover the display area of the image display device 5), the super Instead of the reach first half part (outpost production), it may be shifted to the stock production.

Next, details of the process of determining the effect pattern of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process (step 030IWS805) will be described.

At step 030 IWS805, for example, the chance-up effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS.

Specifically, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance increase), and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the first chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach A: one chance-up) shown in FIG. do.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-4 and PB2-4 of Super Reach A (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the second chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach A: chance-up twice) shown in 7(B), one of the fifth to sixth effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the stock number of items determined in step 030IWS804 is 1, With reference to the third chance-up production pattern determination table (super reach B: one-time chance-up) shown in 7(C), one of the first to fourth production patterns for performing one chance-up production is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up), and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 2, With reference to the fourth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up twice) shown in 7(D), one of the fifth to seventh effect patterns for performing the chance-up effect twice is determined.

In addition, if the variation pattern is one of the variation patterns PA2-5 and PB2-5 of Super Reach B (with chance up) and the number of items in stock determined in step 030IWS804 is 3, With reference to the fifth chance-up effect pattern determination table (super reach B: chance-up 3 times) shown in 7(E), the eighth effect pattern of performing the chance-up effect three times is determined.

For example, in the first effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the title display (the effect of displaying the title display) is executed once. Further, for example, in the eighth production pattern of the chance-up production, the production mode of the title display (production of displaying the title display) is changed, and the production mode of the dialogue display (dialogue display is displayed) is changed. and a chance-up effect for changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect for displaying the decorative pattern) are executed respectively.

In this example, before the chance-up effect is executed, the chance-up effect is executed to incite whether or not the chance-up effect is to be executed. There are two types of chance-up stimulating effects: one in which the chance-up effect is executed after the effect, and the other in which the chance-up effect is not executed. ).

In the chance-up fanning effect (true), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole (entity) ) the image 030IWG11) is displayed. On the other hand, in the chance-up inciting effect (false), after an image suggesting a keyhole corresponding to the stocked item (key) (for example, keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is displayed, an image showing the keyhole (for example, keyhole The (substantial) image 030IWG11) is not displayed, and the image suggesting the keyhole (for example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13) is deleted.

In this example, the chance-up fanning effect (true) is always executed before the chance-up effect is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-7, for example, in the fourth effect pattern and the seventh effect pattern of the chance-up effect, the chance-up effect is executed for dialogue display (dialogue effect for displaying the dialogue display). However, the chance-up prompting effect (false) that is not executed as a result is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which of the effects the chance-up effect is to be executed. Not limited to the example shown in FIG. 8-7, when the chance-up effect is not executed and the stocked item (key) remains, the chance-up effect (false) is executed. You may do so.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-7 (A) to (E), each production pattern of the chance-up production is configured such that the ratio determined at the time of the big win is different (that is, the degree of expectation for the big win is different). . With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect pattern of the chance-up effect. In particular, it is constructed so that the degree of expectation for a big hit becomes higher as the timing of change as the object of the chance-up effect becomes later (that is, in the order of decorative pattern change>word display change>title display change). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing and which chance-up effect targeting which effect is executed.

In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern) is not executed in the case of super reach A, and can be executed only in the case of super reach B. there is With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which type of super reach the chance-up effect is executed.

It should be noted that not only the examples shown in FIGS. 8-7, but also in any kind of super reach, the chance-up effect of changing the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect displaying the decorative pattern) can be executed. may be In addition, in this example, the chance-up effect is configured to be executed a maximum of three times. Further, the chance-up performance for the active display can be executed at both the second timing and the fourth timing so that the chance-up performance is executed up to five times. good too.

Next, the details of the processing (step 030IWS806) of determining the effect mode after the change of the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect in the variable display start setting process will be described.

In step 030 IWS 806, if it is determined to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the title display (effect for displaying the title display), the title display change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8(A) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change. Further, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the active display (effect of displaying the active display), the active display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(B) is changed. Refer to it to determine the pattern of change. In addition, when it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the dialogue display (the dialogue effect that displays the dialogue display), the dialogue display change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 8-8(C) to determine the pattern of change. Also, if it is decided to execute a chance-up effect that changes the effect mode of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect that displays the decorative pattern), the decorative pattern change pattern shown in FIG. 8-8 (D) is determined. Refer to the table to determine the pattern of change.

In this example, title display (effect of displaying title display), active display (effect of displaying active display), dialogue display (effect of displaying dialogue display) and decorative pattern (decorative pattern effect of displaying decorative pattern) , the degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the color tone of the effect image related to the effect. For example, it is configured to suggest that the degree of expectation for a big hit is high in the order of gold>red>green>blue>normal color (white).

When the title display change pattern is determined to be the first change pattern, the title display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the title display changes to the normal color ( white) to green.

Also, when the change pattern of the active display is determined to be the first change pattern, the active display changes from normal color (white) to blue at the first timing of the first half of Super Reach, and is determined to be the second change pattern. In this case, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the first timing, and if the third change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to green at the third timing. If the fourth change pattern is determined, the active display changes from the normal color (white) to red at the third timing.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-reading notice effect that changes the pending display (and active display), the effect pattern determined as the pre-reading notice effect at the time of the start winning (for example, the change timing and the display mode after the change are determined) ), a chance-up effect targeting the active display may be executed.

When the change pattern of dialogue display is determined to be the first change pattern, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to blue, and when the second change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes to the normal color ( white) to green, and if the third change pattern is determined, the dialogue display changes from the normal color (white) to red.

In addition, when the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined to be the first variation pattern, the decorative design changes from the normal color (white) to green, and when the second variation pattern is determined, the decorative design changes to the normal color. The color (white) changes to red, and when the third change pattern is determined, the decorative pattern changes from the normal color (white) to gold.

In this example, when the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect, the tendency of the effect mode after the change is different according to the timing of the change. Specifically, the chance-up effect for the active display is configured such that the third timing after the first timing is more likely to change to a more expected effect mode. In addition, the chance-up effect for decorative patterns is executed later than the chance-up effect for title display, active display, and dialogue display, and it is easy to change to a production mode with high expectations. is configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed, and the game with expectations for the changing timing (for example, expectations increased as the first half of the super reach progressed). It is possible to prevent disappointing people.

In addition, if the color displayed after the change at the earlier timing suggests that the expectation is higher than the color displayed after the change at the later timing, it will be displayed after the change at the later timing. The effect mode (color) to be displayed may be re-determined so as not to cause a decline in the degree of expectation.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of a super ready-to-win effect including a stock effect and a chance-up effect will be described. 8-9 to 8-10 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of stock effects. In addition, in FIGS. 8-9 to 8-10, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

(Stock production (5th production pattern))
In Figures 8-9 to 8-10, one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B, and two items (keys) are stocked at timing C. A stock effect of the fifth effect pattern is shown.

Specifically, when the variable display is started and the ready-to-win state is established, a decorative design showing "6" is displayed in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5. Then, at the start timing of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), the image display device 5 displays the title display of the stock effect "KEY STOCK" and "TIME". Note that the display mode of the title display may indicate the number of items (keys) to be stocked in the stock effect to be started later, or that many items (keys) are to be stocked. For example, the title display is generally displayed in normal color (white), but when displayed in red, it suggests that there are more items (keys) stocked than when displayed in normal color (white). may be made.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (1), except during a special effect, etc., the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display, and corresponds to the special symbol. A small pattern KZ and a reserved memory count HS indicating the reserved memory count are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Next, when the stock effect is started, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a timer image 030IWG01 indicating the remaining time of the stock effect and a "key stock TIME" display 030IWG02 indicating that the stock effect is in progress. is displayed. Further, at timing A of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (2), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. .

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, one key is stocked at the timing A. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 9(3), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 1" indicating that one key is stocked as an item, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (4), one key moves from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen and is stocked. A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-9 (5). Specifically, an effect display is performed in which the character A rides on a swing in the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a display is performed in which the remaining time shown in the timer image 030IWG01 decreases. At this time, a stock key image 030G03 indicating the number of keys currently stocked is displayed.

Next, at the timing B of the stock effect, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (6), a character A prompting an operation to press the push button 31B, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed. . In this example, an effect display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is performed at timing A, timing B, and timing C of the stock effect, but the character A poses differently. Therefore, even if the effect for prompting the pressing operation is performed a plurality of times, the interest of each timing can be improved without boring the player.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, the key is not stocked at the timing B. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. 8-9 (7 ), an image with a close-up face of character A, a character display of "!?" The image shown is not displayed.

In this way, by executing an effect such as displaying a character image instead of the key when the key is not stocked, it is possible to alleviate the regret that the key was not stocked. In addition, in the stock effect of this example, even if only one key is stocked, the effect execution time is equivalent to the case where three keys are stocked. Therefore, if the key is not stocked even if the button is pressed for a period of time, the presentation becomes redundant, and there is a risk that the interest will decrease. Therefore, when the key is not stocked in this way, the character image is displayed instead to liven up the presentation, so that the stock presentation is not lowered even if the stock number is small. It should be noted that the character image to be displayed when not stocked is not limited to one type, and may be varied according to the type of Super Reach to be executed. By doing so, it is possible to anticipate the future development from the displayed character image, and to give the character image a dramatic meaning.

Since the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is performed when the key is not stocked (that is, indicating that the key is not stocked), the effect display shown in FIG. 8-9 (7) is displayed. After the displayed image is erased, an effect display in which the stock effect progresses as shown in FIG. 8-9(8) is displayed, but the number of stocked keys indicated by the stock key image 030G03 does not increase. Note that the effect display when the item is stocked as shown in FIG. 8-9 (3) and the effect display when the item is not stocked as shown in FIG. A short period is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed or losing interest by displaying an unfavorable effect for a long time without the effect of increasing the number of stocks. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (9), an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed, and at timing C of the stock effect, the push button 31B is pressed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (10). A character A prompting an operation, an operation effective period, and an image simulating the push button 31B are displayed.

In the stock effect of the fifth effect pattern, two keys are stocked at the timing C. Therefore, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period elapses), FIG. As shown in 10 (11), the background image is covered with a character display of "stock x 2" indicating that two keys are stocked as items, an image imitating the key, and an effect image emphasizing them. is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (12), an effect display in which two keys are stocked by moving from the upper left of the screen of the image display device to the lower right of the screen (for example, a key flying from the left back side of the screen) A display that looks like it is stocked on the right front side of the screen) is performed.

When the effect display for stocking the keys ends, the effect display for progressing the stock effect is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-10 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-10 (14), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, as shown in FIG. will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation effective period (or when the operation effective period elapses), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

In this example, when executing the super reach with chance up, first, the stock effect is executed in the super reach introduction part. Then, in the first half of the super ready-to-win, a prelude effect such as a dialogue effect in which the character A and the enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is mainly executed, and a chance-up effect is additionally executed. After that, in the second half of Super Reach, a battle effect is executed in which character A and enemy character B exchange swords. In addition, when executing super reach without chance increase, in the first half of super reach, an outpost production such as dialogue production in which character A and enemy character B face each other and have a conversation is executed, and in the second half of super reach, A battle effect is executed in which the character A and the enemy character B exchange swords.

In the example shown in FIG. 8-10 (16), the battle card for the battle production is "Character A VS Enemy Character B". are different) are provided, and the battle card is determined according to the type of super reach. In other words, the type of super ready-to-win is notified by displaying a battle card with a battle effect triggered by the pressing operation of the push button 31B. With such a configuration, it is possible to heighten the sense of anticipation and tension when performing the pressing operation of the push button 31B at the timing shown in FIG. 8-10 (15). For example, in addition to or instead of the types of super reach, the types of characters on the team side and characters on the enemy side may differ according to the degree of expectation for a big hit. Further, for example, if the production stage is configured to transition according to the game period or game state such as the number of fluctuations, the character associated with the production stage in advance may be one of the enemy characters (the production stage may be any one of a plurality of enemy characters associated with , or may be an enemy character determined by lottery).

(Stock production (first production pattern))
Next, the stock effect of the first effect pattern in which one item (key) is stocked at timing A, no item (key) is stocked at timing B and timing C, and one key is stocked as a result will be described. do.

When the stock effect of the first effect pattern is executed, after the screen transition of FIGS. 8-9 (1) to (8), as shown in FIG. A stock key image 030G03 indicating that there is a stock key is displayed, and an effect display in which the stock effect progresses is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-11 (10), when the remaining time indicated by the timer image 030IWG01 reaches 0, a display prompting the user to press the push button 31B is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-11 (11). will be

Then, when the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (or when the operation valid period passes), as shown in FIG. VS Enemy Character B", character A and enemy character B are displayed, and the stock presentation ends.

(Outline of Super Reach first half and second half)
Next, the outline of the effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach will be described. FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13 are explanatory diagrams showing an outline of effects in the first half part and the second half part of Super Reach. In addition, in FIGS. 8-12 and 8-13, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

When the Super Reach introduction part (stock effect) ends and the first half of Super Reach begins, as shown in Fig. 8-12 (1), the title display of Super Reach B with the words "Death Fight between Two People" is displayed. be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-12(1), in the lower right of the display area of the image display device 5, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 stocked in the stock effect are displayed. In this example, it is assumed that three keys are stocked in the stock effect in advance, and the three keys are displayed in a manner of moving around the mini-character A. In this example, the keys stocked in the stock effect of the super reach introduction part are displayed as the mini key image 030IWG10 or the key image 030IWG12 in the first half of the super reach.

In addition, in the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R of the image display device 5, the decorative design showing "6" is displayed, and the active display AH is displayed on the lower left side of the display area of the image display device 5 as the active display. , and a small symbol KZ corresponding to the special symbol and a reserved memory number HS indicating the number of reserved memories are displayed on the central right side of the display area of the image display device 5 .

8-12(2), the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other, and after the dialogue image 030IWG20 of "It's a game" is displayed, As shown in 12(3), the line image 030IWG20 of "I'll get back to you" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-12(4), the character A image 030IWC01 is displayed alone, and the dialogue image 030IWG20 saying "I won't hold back" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 8-12 (2) to (4), when the outpost effect is being executed and the chance-up effect is not being executed, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed on the image display device 5. An effect display is performed in which the ends of the display area are moved. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Here, when the chance-up effect targeting the dialogue effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 8-12 (5), a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed in a manner overlapping the dialogue image 030IWG20. be done. At this time, a mini-character A image 030IWC10 holding one key is displayed beside the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Such an effect display indicates that the target of the chance-up effect is the dialogue effect.

Next, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. ) As an effect display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-12(7).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the dialog image 030IWG20 changes from normal color (white) to blue, as shown in FIG. 8-12(8). With such an effect display, the effect mode of the dialogue effect changes as a result of the chance-up effect.

After that, when the super reach first half part (outpost effect and chance up effect) ends and the super reach second half part begins, character A image 030IWC01 and enemy character A image 030IWC02 are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-13 (9). A battle production where swords are exchanged begins.

Then, when the character A wins against the enemy character A, the characters "Victory" are displayed as shown in FIG. A combination of "666" decorative patterns is displayed.

(Chance up production)
Next, the chance-up effect outlined in FIG. 8-12 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18. FIGS. 8-14 to 8-18 also show portions of the chance-up effect that are omitted from FIG. 8-12.

FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the chance-up effect for active display. In addition, in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of super reach, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), a prelude effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-14(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images. Although the details will be described later, the effect image related to the outpost effect is hidden by the effect image related to the chance-up effect at the timings of (13) to (14) in FIG. 8-15.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-14(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-14(4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the active display AH targeted for the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-14(5). Then, an effect display is performed in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 overlaps the active display AH. At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the chance-up effect and the target effect of the chance-up effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette on the active display AH, and an effect display is performed in which a glowing effect image is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(7), a keyhole (real) image 030IWG11 imitating a keyhole is displayed on the active display AH. This kind of effect display makes it clear that the chance-up boosting effect being executed is the chance-up boosting effect (true) and that the target of the chance-up effect is the active display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-14(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-15 (9), and then reduced as shown in FIG. 8-15 (10) It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 while (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the key image 030IWG12 acting on the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11, thereby enhancing the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Then, as an effect display of the key being stuck in the keyhole, a key image 030IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as shown in FIG. As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-15(12).

When an effect display is performed in which the key turns through the keyhole (ie, the key is unlocked), as shown in FIG. A character display is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13), the character A is displayed close up together with the effect image covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, whereby the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the sense of discomfort.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (14), the character A and the character display of "pending rank up" are erased while the effect image covering the image related to the outpost production is displayed, and the active display AH is in the silhouette state. , and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed again, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed.

In this example, when the chance-up effect for the active display is executed, as shown in FIG. 030IWC10>effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect>active display AH>image related to the outpost effect are displayed in higher layers in this order.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (15), the effect image covering the image related to the outpost effect is erased, and the active display AH changed from normal color (white) to blue is displayed. In addition, since one of the stocks has been released and the item (key) has been consumed by the chance-up effect for the active display, the number of mini-key images 030IWG10 that moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10 is one. It's getting less.

In this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed when the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is being executed, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is acted on by the key image 030IWG12. to run. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 and 8-15, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, and a key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11. Execute the chance-up production at . With such a configuration, when the chance-up effect using the key image 030IWG12 is executed, the key image 030IWG12 is inserted into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 and turns around (that is, the key is opened). It is possible to enhance the performance effect and improve the amusement.

In addition, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect (for example, see FIG. 8-14 (7)). At the timing when 030IWG11 is displayed, the chance-up effect for other effects is not executed. For example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, the chance-up effect for the dialogue display is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the chance-up effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (8), the stored key image and character image (that is, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10) are moved and displayed to create a chance-up effect. is executed, an effect display is performed in which the character throws the key into the keyhole. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A-image 030IWC10, and when the chance-up effect is executed, , to stop its operation. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the key image and enhance the effect of the chance-up presentation.

Also, in this example, the appearance of the key is different between when the key is stocked and when the key is used. For example, as shown in FIG. 8-9 (8), when the key image is displayed in the lower right of the display area in the stock effect, and as shown in FIG. The display size of the key image is smaller in the latter case than when the key image is displayed so as to move. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the key image easily visible in the stock effect in which the key is the main focus, and to prevent the key from standing out too much in the outpost effect. For example, when the key is stocked in the stock effect, and when the character throws the key toward the keyhole in the chance up effect (the most enlarged state at the beginning), the display size of the key image is larger in the latter. You may make it With such a configuration, it is possible to have a greater impact when releasing the stock than when the key is stocked. Further, by giving an impact, even if the performance targeted for the chance-up performance has a low degree of expectation, it is possible to impress the player that it is a desirable performance.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up effect for decorative symbols will be described. FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of chance-up effects for decorative symbols. In addition, in FIGS. 8-16 to 8-18, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

In the first half of Super Reach, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an outpost effect is executed in which the character A image 030IWC01 and the enemy character A image 030IWC02 face each other. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), an effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move at the end of the display area of the image display device 5. FIG. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini-character A image 030IWC10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-16(1), the movable body 32 is positioned at the initial position covering part of the upper display area of the image display device 5 .

Effect images related to outpost effects (for example, character A image 030IWC01, enemy character A image 030IWC02, etc.) are also displayed in FIGS. In this example, the effect image related to the outpost effect is a effect image related to the chance-up effect (for example, a key image, a keyhole image, a mini character image, etc.), and a effect image related to the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect (for example, (Title display, active display, dialogue display, decorative pattern), and is displayed in a lower layer than those images.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (true) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-16(2). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed. Note that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 displayed in the chance-up effect is represented by a dotted line in this example as shown in FIGS. It has a transparency that makes it possible to visually recognize the effect image), and the content of the super reach (that is, the outpost effect) is not hindered as much as possible even while the chance-up fan effect is being executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(3), an effect display is started in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is gradually reduced. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (4), the gradually shrinking keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaches the decorative pattern display area that is the target of the chance-up effect, and eventually, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (5). Thus, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 reaches near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). At this time, a triangular mark indicating reduction is displayed around the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. Also, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed to move so as to follow the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 approaching the active display AH.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(6), the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 becomes a silhouette state, and an effect display is performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are put in a silhouette state, and an effect display is also performed in which an effect image that shines around is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-16(5) to 8-16(6), when changing the pose of mini-character A, the silhouette image is displayed once, and then the silhouette image is displayed. , the mini-character A image in the pose after the change from . In this way, instead of using material data that changes the pose of a mini character by moving it, the material data is simplified by switching the image with the silhouette image in between, thereby reducing the man-hours and costs required for production. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(7), a keyhole (substantial) image is placed near the central position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C). 030IWG11 is displayed. Through such presentation display, it becomes clear that the chance-up fanning presentation being executed is the chance-up fanning presentation (true), and that the object of the chance-up fanning presentation is the decoration pattern.

In this example, when executing the chance-up effect targeting dialogue effects, as shown in FIG. When executing the chance-up effect for the pattern, as shown in FIG. A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the display area from the corresponding position). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 from being covered by the movable body 32 and becoming difficult to see, and the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is preferably displayed according to the characteristics of the target effect. can do.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-16(8), an effect display is performed in which the character A located on the front side of the screen throws the key into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 located on the back side of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), an effect display is performed in which the key image 030IWG12 appears to move from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Therefore, the key image 030IWG12 is initially displayed in a larger display size than the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 as shown in FIG. 8-17(9), and then as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 while shrinking (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of moving away).

8-17 (11), a key image 30IWG12 and a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 are displayed as an effect display that the key is stuck in the keyhole, and an effect that the key turns in the keyhole (that is, the key is unlocked). As a display, a key image 030IWG12 rotated from a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17(12).

When the effect display of turning the key through the keyhole (that is, unlocking the key) is performed, the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13). Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (14), while the character A and the character display of "symbol rank up" are displayed, the left decoration design starts rotating in the left decoration design display area 5L, and the right decoration design is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the right decorative pattern starts rotating in the pattern display area 5R. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14), the character A is displayed close-up to hide the effect image related to the outpost effect, and the chance-up effect is executed during the outpost effect. It reduces the discomfort of being

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (15), an image of characters A and B standing side by side is displayed near the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the left ornament rotates to a position superimposed on the image. An effect display is performed in which the pattern and the right decorative pattern move. Then, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (16), a glowing effect image is displayed around the rotating left decorative pattern and right decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (17), when the glowing effect image around the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is erased, the normal color (white) changes to gold and the characters "GOLD" are displayed. The left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern with the display are displayed, and the effect display is performed in which the rotation of the left decorative pattern and the right decorative pattern is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (18), gold right and left decorative patterns are displayed in the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and the remaining outpost effect is performed. executed. Since all the stocked keys have been used due to the execution of the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern, the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are not displayed thereafter, but a message indicating that they will not be displayed is displayed. No special effects are performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the mini-key image 030IWG10, which is no longer used, from standing out.

In this example, regardless of where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of which production is the target of the chance-up production), at least a part of the chance-up promotion production is It is carried out in a common manner. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5) and FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5), the keyhole (suggestion ) The image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common mode in which it is initially displayed in full screen and then reduced in size. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed, that is, whether or not the chance-up effect is executed, and which effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can draw attention to.

In this example, in the chance-up effect, regardless of the position where the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed (that is, regardless of the type of target effect), the image is displayed at a common display position to be the target effect. It informs that the production mode of will change. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "holding rank up" or "design rank up" are displayed, and the production mode is Notify you of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target effect changes due to the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the target effect changes in the chance-up effect. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15) and FIGS. It is not displayed at the timing when the mode of changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the target effect is changed by the chance-up effect.

Further, in this example, the effect image related to at least a part of the multiple types of effects targeted for the chance-up effect has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. high. Specifically, the decorative pattern has a higher display priority than the key image even when the key image acts on the keyhole image. With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some effects in any situation. In addition, for effects images other than some effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game such as dialogue display and title display), display priority is given to the key image when the key image acts on the keyhole image. By making the intensity lower, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), when executing the chance-up effect, an effect image or a character covering the effect image related to the outpost effect, a "suspended rank It is possible to display notification images such as character display such as "up" or "symbol rank up". Then, a production pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13) to FIG. In addition, a pattern in which the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the characters and the character display of "pattern rank up" remain), and when the notification image is displayed, the effect of the target effect is changed. Effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), the pattern in which the active display mode changes after the effect image, character, and character display of “pending rank up” are erased) , the chance-up effect can be executed. With such a configuration, the player can be made to recognize that the presentation mode of the target presentation changes by displaying the notification image, and the chance-up presentation can be suitably performed by the presentation pattern corresponding to the target presentation. can be executed. Especially for the former, by seamlessly increasing the chance while the notification image is being displayed (that is, changing the effect mode of the target effect), it is possible to make the effect more flashy. By performing a chance up (that is, a change in the effect mode of the target effect) after is erased, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to the effect control.

In addition, in this example, when the notification image is displayed, the effect pattern of changing the effect mode of the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect is different from when the notification image is displayed. The degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than the performance pattern that changes the performance mode of the performance. Specifically, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation of a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the notification image uses an image that can specify which effect mode of the effect has changed, and is different from the effect image related to the effect. For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the effects has changed in the effect mode.

Further, in this example, the notification image displayed during execution of the chance-up effect is displayed in a manner covering the effect image related to the super reach (outpost effect), but the effect targeted for the chance-up effect is There are cases where the image is covered by the notification image and cases where the image is not covered, and the latter has a higher expectation of a big hit than the former. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. "Rank up" is displayed, but this notification image covers the active display AH, but does not cover the decoration pattern. Then, the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the chance-up effect, and the interest can be improved.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the relevant effect image is not covered, and the latter is more within one variable display period than the former. The rate of execution at later timing is high. Specifically, the timing of execution of the chance-up effect in which the form of the decoration pattern changes is later than that of the chance-up effect in which the form of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the chance-up effect in accordance with the time when the expectations of the player are high.

Further, in this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect include those in which the relevant effect image is covered by the notification image and those in which the effect image is not covered. Switch to an image and display it. Specifically, when the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern is executed, after the character A image is displayed as shown in FIGS. ) to FIG. 8-18 (17), an image in which character A and character B stand side by side is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated chance-up production.

Next, a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (fake) will be described. FIG. 8-19 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the chance-up fanning effect (false). In addition, in FIG. 8-19, the effect screen transitions in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

FIG. 8-19 (1) shows the state immediately after the outpost effect in the first half of the super reach is started and the chance-up effect for the active display is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-19(1), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are placed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5 after the chance-up effect is executed. It is redisplayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are the targets of the chance-up effect (for example, title display, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern). The end of the display area of the image display device 5 is moved so as to pass through the display position. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 8-19 (1) and (2), before the dialogue effect is started, so as to pass through the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed (or the position where display is scheduled). An effect display is performed in which the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 move. With such a configuration, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner, it is desired to execute a chance-up effect targeting the effect at the displayed position. The expectation of the player can be heightened, and the amusement can be improved.

In this example, the effects targeted for the chance-up effect are displayed at various positions such as the upper, lower, and lower right portions of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are Move through the position. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the position where the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are moved and displayed, and whether the effect displayed at that position is the target of the chance-up effect. .

Further, in this example, after executing one chance-up effect targeting one effect, when executing another chance-up effect targeting another effect, one chance-up effect is executed and a predetermined period of time elapses. After that, another chance-up effect is executed (see FIG. 8-4). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one chance-up effect and another chance-up effect to make each stand out, and as shown in FIGS. It is possible to secure a period during which the key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 are displayed in a moving manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), when the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are moving at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image The 030IWC10 has a lower display priority than the effect images (for example, active display, dialogue display, decoration pattern, etc.) related to the effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect, and is displayed in a lower layer than them. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to an effect that can be the target of the chance-up effect. Note that the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are not limited to such a configuration, and are among the effects that can be the target of the chance-up effect when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. Displayed on a lower layer than the effect image (for example, decoration pattern) related to some effects, and displayed on a higher layer than the effect image (for example, active display and dialogue display) related to other effects. good too.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed during execution of Super Ready-to-Wear, and are effect images related to Super-Reach (for example, character images related to Senseki effect). ), but when the chance-up effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image relating to super reach is displayed so as not to be obstructed. Specifically, the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 are displayed so as to move at the ends of the display area without moving in the center of the display area of the image display device 5. It is not superimposed and displayed on the part. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent interference with the super reach (outpost effect) while displaying the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10.

Next, when the chance-up fanning effect (false) is executed, a keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 suggesting the appearance of a keyhole is displayed in the center of the display area, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3). At this time, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 stop moving to the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and the mini-key image 030IWG10 stops moving around the mini-character A image 030IWC10. . Next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "!" indicating the presence of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8-19(3), when the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10 move so as to approach the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13. do.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the moving speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are set when the target effect to be used is not specified (or when there is a chance When it is specified (or when the chance-up effect is not being executed), it is a high-speed movement. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect that is the target of the chance-up effect and the chance-up effect.

Next, an effect display in which the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 gradually shrinks is started, but as shown in FIG. ) The image 030IWG13 is erased. At this time, next to the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A image 030IWC10, a "?" indicating that the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 has been deleted is displayed. With such a configuration, it becomes clear that the executed chance-up fanning effect is a chance-up fanning effect (false).

8-19(5), the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are displayed at the initial position at the bottom right of the display area of the image display device 5. It will be fixed. In this example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and after the chance-up effect (false) is executed as shown in FIG. , displayed in a common initial position. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the chance-up fanning effect (false) has ended, and it is possible to express the meaning of restarting. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

In this example, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 can be displayed only once corresponding to the same presentation. For example, when a chance-up promotion effect (or chance-up promotion effect (false)) that agitates whether or not a chance-up production effect for dialogue display is executed once, the dialogue display is displayed after that. Even if it is, the chance-up fanning production targeting the dialogue display is not executed again. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestion effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

The mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are partly protruded outside the display area (that is, partly not displayed) when moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5. good too. With such a configuration, the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 can be flexibly moved and displayed in accordance with other effects such as effect images.

Further, for example, when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5, an effect not targeted for the chance-up effect may not be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the effects performed when the mini-key image 030IWG10 and the mini-character A-image 030IWC10 are moving in the end of the display area of the image display device 5 .

Also, in this example, since the chance-up effect can be executed a plurality of times, the number of times it has been executed may be recognized. For example, when the first chance-up effect is executed, an effect image simulating a blue flame is displayed at the end of the display area of the image display device 5, and when the second chance-up effect is executed, the effect image is displayed. When the effect image changes to green and the third chance-up effect is executed, the effect image may change to red. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the chance-up has been performed even after the chance-up effect is finished and the related effect image is erased.

Next, the keyhole (suggestion) image and the keyhole (substantial) image for each effect of the chance-up effect will be described. FIG. 8-20 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a keyhole (entity) image for each effect that is the target of the chance-up effect.

As shown in FIG. 8-20, in this example, there are a plurality of types of effects to be targeted for the chance-up effect, and the display sizes of the effect images related to the respective effects are different. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8-20 (1) and (3), the dialogue display has a smaller display size than the title display. In this example, the chance-up effect is executed in such a manner that the keyhole (entity) image is displayed at the position where the effect to be the target of the chance-up effect is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-20, the display size of the keyhole (substantial) image is configured to vary according to the target rendering.

For example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. The display size is smaller than the image 030IWG11. With such a configuration, the player can predict the target effect of the chance-up effect from the position where the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed, thereby improving the interest and target effect. By displaying the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 in a display size suitable for the display size, it is possible to produce a presentation that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the keyhole image is materialized, the silhouette of the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is displayed in a common size regardless of the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. . After that, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed in a display size corresponding to the type of effect targeted for the chance-up effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the animation until the keyhole is materialized, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control.

As described above, the characterizing portion 030IW discloses the configuration of the game machine shown in means 1 to 29 below.

(Means 1) A game machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player, and that suggests control to be in an advantageous state and has a plurality of different expectations depending on the performance mode. Types of suggestive effects (for example, effect of displaying title display in a predetermined mode, effect of displaying active display in a predetermined mode, dialogue effect of displaying dialogue display in a predetermined mode, display of decorative patterns in a predetermined mode) a special image display effect execution means capable of displaying a special image (for example, a mini key image 030IWG10 or a key image 030IWG12), and a displayed special image. , a special effect (for example, changing the display color of the active display from normal color (white) to blue and a special effect executing means capable of executing a chance-up effect that changes to a normal image), and the special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image (for example, a keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11) when the suggestive effect is being executed. Then, a special effect is executed in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image (for example, the active display AH or the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the decoration pattern is displayed, and the keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed. 8-15 (9) to (15), FIGS. 8-17 (9) to 8-18 (17), etc.). According to such a configuration, when a special effect using a special image is executed, the story related to the special image can be imparted to enhance the effect of the effect, thereby improving interest.

(Means 2) The special correspondence image is displayed at substantially the center position of the effect image related to the suggested effect being executed (see, for example, FIG. 8-12 (5) and FIG. 8-14 (7)), and the special correspondence image is displayed, a special effect for suggestive effects other than the suggestive effect corresponding to the special correspondence image is not executed (for example, at the timing when the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 corresponding to the active display AH is displayed, , The chance-up effect for dialogue display is not executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect, and to make the player pay attention to when the special corresponding image is displayed.

(Means 3) A special correspondence image can be displayed only once in response to the same suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up stimulating effect (or a chance (False)) is executed once, the chance-up boosting effect targeting the dialogue display is not executed again even if the dialogue display is displayed after that). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to understand the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 4) When the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes due to the special effect, the effect mode after the change differs depending on the timing of the change (for example, the timing at which the chance-up effect is executed later is more advantageous (See Figures 8-3 and 8-8). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which timing the special performance will be executed, and to prevent the player who expects the changing timing from being disappointed.

(Means 5) A display stimulus effect executing means capable of executing a display stimulus effect (for example, a chance-up stimulus effect) for inciting whether or not the special corresponding image is displayed is provided, and the display stimulus effect executing means Regardless of the display position, it is possible to execute the display effect in a common manner (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (2) to (5), FIGS. 8-16 (2) to (5) As shown in FIG. 2, the keyhole (suggestion) image 030IWG13 is initially displayed up on the entire screen and then displayed in a common manner, even when the target effects are different). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the special correspondence image is displayed, that is, whether or not the special effect is executed, and also to pay attention to which suggestive effect is the target of the chance-up effect. can be made

(Means 6) When a special image is used in a special effect, it is displayed in a display size larger than that of the special corresponding image, and then displayed so as to act on the special corresponding image while being reduced (for example, FIG. 8- 15 (9) to (12), as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (9) to (12), the key image 030IWG12 moves from the front side of the screen toward the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 on the back side. Since it is displayed, it is initially displayed in a display size larger than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11, and then while being reduced (gradually becoming smaller as an expression of going away), it is stuck in the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11. (displayed as rotating). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image acting on the special correspondence image, and to enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 7) The special effect execution means can execute the special effect multiple times, and can vary the execution time according to the special effect to be executed (for example, in FIG. 8-4 (A) As shown, the chance-up effect for the decoration pattern has a longer effect execution time than the dialogue display or the chance-up effect for the dialogue display. can be executed, and the production effect can be enhanced.

(Means 8) The suggestive effect has a longer execution time when the effect mode changes due to the special effect than when the effect mode does not change due to the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-4 (A) and (B) Thus, the effect execution time T11 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode changes due to the chance-up effect is longer than the effect execution time T12 of the dialogue effect in which the effect mode does not change due to the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, when the special performance is executed, it is possible to secure a period during which the special performance and the suggestive performance targeted for the special performance are performed.

(Means 9) The suggestive effect executing means includes a first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a title display) and a second suggestive effect having a smaller display size than the first suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying dialogue). ), and the special effect executing means, when the suggestive effect is being executed, performs the special effect in a manner of displaying the special correspondence image at the position where the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed. It is executable (for example, a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position where the title image 030IWG21 is displayed or the position where the dialogue image 030IWG20 is displayed), and the suggestion effect to be the target of the special effect is the first suggestion. When it is the performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the first display size corresponding to the display size of the first suggestion performance, and when it is the second suggestion performance, the special correspondence image is displayed in the display size of the second suggestion performance. The second display size is smaller than the first display size (for example, the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the serif image 030IWG20 shown in FIG. 8-20(3) is , smaller than the keyhole (substance) image 030IWG11 displayed at the position of the title image 030IWG21 shown in FIG. 8-20(1)). With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player by enabling the player to predict the target suggestive effect from the position where the special correspondence image is displayed, and at the same time, the display size suitable for the target effect can be obtained. By displaying the special correspondence image on the screen, it is possible to achieve a production that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

(Means 10) Suggestive effect executing means provides a specific suggestive effect (for example, a effect of displaying dialogue) that displays a effect image at a first position, and a second position that is closer to the end of the display area of the display means than the first position. A special suggestive effect (for example, an effect of displaying a decorative pattern) in which the effect image is displayed at a position (for example, a position near the upper end of the display area of the image display device 5) can be executed, and the special effect executing means is a specified When the suggestive effect is executed, the special correspondence image is displayed at approximately the center position of the effect image displayed at the first position (for example, approximately at the center of the dialog image 030IWG20 as shown in FIG. (a keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is displayed at the position), and when the special suggestion effect is executed, the position shifted from the center position of the effect image displayed at the second position toward the center of the display area of the display means is specially handled. Display an image (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-16 (7), display from the center position between the left decorative design display area 5L and the right decorative design display area 5R (the position corresponding to the middle decorative design display area 5C) A keyhole (substantial) image 030IWG11 is displayed at a position shifted toward the center of the area). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably display a special correspondence image according to the feature of the target suggestive effect.

(Means 11) The special effect includes a notification effect in which a special image is displayed at a common display position regardless of the position at which the special corresponding image is displayed to notify that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes (for example, , as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (13) and 8-17 (13), the character and the character display of "pending rank up" and "symbol rank up" are displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect mode of the target suggestive effect changes due to the special effect.

(Means 12) The special correspondence image is not displayed at the timing when the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted in the special effect changes (for example, FIGS. 8-15 (13) to (15), FIGS. As shown in FIG. 8-18 (17), the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11 is not displayed at the timing when the mode of active display or decorative pattern changes). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that the effect mode of the suggestive effect changes.

(Means 13) The special image display means displays the special image in a manner of moving past the display position of the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect during a period before the special effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4) and FIGS. 8-19 (1) to (2), the dialogue The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move so as to pass through the position where the speech image related to the effect is displayed (or the position where the display is scheduled). With such a configuration, when the special image is displayed in a moving manner, the player's expectation that the special performance targeting the suggestive performance of the position where the special image is displayed is executed. It can enhance interest and improve interest.

(Means 14) When a special image is used, the special image display means moves and displays the special image to the display position of the target suggestive effect (for example, FIG. 8-14 (5), FIG. 8-16 ( 5), the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 move to the display position of the active display AH or the decoration pattern display area, which is the target of the chance-up effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special effect and the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect.

(Means 15) The special image has a lower display priority than the effect image related to the suggestive effect that is the target of the special effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-15 (14) and 8-19 (2), The mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 have a lower display priority than the title display, the active display, the dialogue display, and the decoration pattern, and are displayed in a lower layer than them). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the suggestive effect.

(Means 16) The special effect executing means can execute another special effect targeting another suggestive effect after executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, and the other special effect is , one special effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has passed). With such a configuration, it is possible to leave an interval between one special effect and another special effect to make each of them stand out, and to secure a period during which the special image is displayed in a moving manner.

(Means 17) The speed at which the special image is moved and displayed is faster when the suggestive effect to be used is specified than when the suggestive effect to be used is not specified (for example, As shown in FIGS. 8-19 (2) and (3), the movement speeds of the mini-character A image 030IWC10 and the mini-key image 030IWG10 are slow movement when the effect to be used is not specified. is fast when you are on it). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the target suggestive effect.

(Means 18) When the special image is moved and displayed, the additional image is added, the additional image is also moved and displayed, and the additional image operates when the special effect is executed (for example, FIG. 8-14 ( 1) to (8), FIGS. 8-16 (1) to (8), and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini character A image 030IWC10 is moved and displayed together with the mini key image 030IWG10, and the chance-up effect is performed. When executed, the character A image 030IWC10 throws the key image 030IWG12 into the keyhole (entity) image 030IWG11). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 19) The special image is displayed in a manner of moving around the additional image, and the movement is stopped when the special effect is executed (for example, FIGS. 8-14 (1) to (6), FIG. As shown in 8-16 (1) to (6) and FIG. 8-19 (2), the mini key image 030IWG10 moves around the mini character A image 030IWC10, and a chance-up effect is executed. sometimes it stops working). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special image and enhance the effect of the special presentation.

(Means 20) The special image and the additional image are displayed during execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) suggesting that the control is in an advantageous state, and have a higher display priority than the effect image related to the specific effect. Displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-12 (1) to (4), the mini key image 030IWG10 and the mini character A image 030IWC10 have a higher display priority than the character images related to the outpost production in the first half of Super Reach). ), and when the specific effect is being executed and the special effect is not being executed, at least the central part of the effect image related to the specific effect is displayed so as not to hinder the visibility (for example, FIG. 8 -12 (1) to (4), as shown in FIG. It is displayed so as to move the part, and is not displayed superimposed on the face etc. of the character image related to the outpost production). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special image and the additional image from interfering with the specific effect while displaying the special image and the additional image.

(Means 21) Suggesting that a special effect will be executed, a first special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (true)) in which the special effect is executed after the effect, and suggesting that the special effect will be executed. and a special suggestive effect executing means capable of executing a second special suggestive effect (for example, a chance-up fanning effect (false)) in which the special effect is not executed after the effect, and the special image is provided with the second special suggestive effect executed. After that, it is displayed again in the initial position (for example, after the chance-up effect is executed as shown in FIG. 8-19 (1), and as shown in FIG. 8-19 (5), the chance-up effect is displayed (false) is executed and appears in the common initial position). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the second special suggestive effect has ended, and to express the meaning of the restart. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data related to effect control by redisplaying at the initial position.

(Means 22) The special effect executing means can execute the special effect a plurality of times, and when executing one special effect targeting one suggestive effect, another A special effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-4, a chance-up effect with a different target is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special performance being executed.

(Means 23) A rendering image (for example, a decoration pattern) related to at least a part of the suggestive rendering out of a plurality of types of suggestive rendering has display priority over the special image even when the special image acts on the special correspondence image. high degree (see, for example, Fig. 8-15 (9)). With such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the visibility of some suggestive effects in any situation. In addition, for effect images other than some suggestive effects (for example, those that are not information related to the progress of the game, such as dialogue display and title display), when the special image acts on the special corresponding image, Also, by lowering the display priority, it is possible to realize a more realistic presentation and enhance the presentation effect.

(Means 24) The special effect executing means can display a specific image when executing the special effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. The effect image that covers the effect image related to the character and the text display of "pending rank up" and "pattern rank up" are displayed), and the effect mode of the suggestive effect to be targeted when the specific image is displayed The first effect pattern to be changed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to 8-18 (17), the appearance of the decorative pattern changes while the character and the "symbol rank up" display remain. pattern), and a second effect pattern (for example, as shown in FIGS. , a pattern in which the mode of the active display changes after the character and the display of "pending rank up" are erased), special effects can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation changes by displaying the specific image, and to suitably execute the special presentation according to the presentation pattern corresponding to the suggested presentation to be targeted. can do.

(Means 25) The degree of expectation that the special effect is controlled to be in an advantageous state is higher when the special effect is executed according to the first effect pattern than when the special effect is executed according to the second effect pattern (for example, the mode of decoration pattern The chance-up effect in which the active display mode changes has a higher expectation for a big hit than the chance-up effect in which the mode of the active display changes (see FIG. 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the showiness of the production pattern, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 26) As the specific image, it is possible to specify which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed, and an image different from the effect image related to the suggestive effect is displayed (for example, FIG. 8-15 (13 ), as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13), the character display of "pending rank up" or "symbol rank up" is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the suggestive effects the effect mode has changed.

(Means 27) The special effect is executed during the execution of a specific effect (for example, super reach) that suggests whether or not to be controlled in an advantageous state, and the specific image displayed during the execution of the special effect is the specific effect. (For example, as shown in FIG. 8-15 (13) and FIG. 8-17 (13), the effect image that covers the effect image related to the outpost production is displayed in a manner that covers the effect image. ” and “symbol rank up” are displayed), and the suggestive effect includes a suggestive effect that is hidden by the specific image and a suggestive effect that is not hidden by the specific image (for example, FIG. 8-15 While the active display AH is covered as shown in (13), the decoration pattern is not covered as shown in FIG. 8-17 (13)). The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the suggestive performance to be hidden (for example, the chance-up performance in which the mode of decoration pattern changes is higher than the chance-up performance in which the mode of active display changes). (see Figure 8-7). With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be varied according to the flashiness of the special presentation, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 28) The special effect of the first effect pattern is executed at a later timing within one variable display period at a higher rate than the special effect of the second effect pattern. The changing chance-up effect is executed later than the chance-up effect in which the mode of active display changes (see FIG. 8-3). With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special effect according to the time when the player's expectations are high.

(Means 29) When the special effect is being executed by the first effect pattern, one specific image is switched to another specific image and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-17 (13) to (14) 8-17(15) to 8-18(17), an image of character A and character B standing side by side is displayed). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the production effect of the highly anticipated special production.

Further, when the advance notice effect such as the suggestion effect or the special effect is executed during the variable display, it is preferable to execute it at the timing when the movable body effect is not being executed. Since the execution timings do not overlap, the visibility of the suggestive effect and the special effect is not obstructed by the movable object, and can be displayed accurately to attract attention. A detailed description will be given of control such as effects using specific movable bodies.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
The game machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first pseudo-moving body display a portion where Z100 can be moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position;
a movable body that can move from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounting movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the rendering position);
with
The direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are common directions ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are common downward direction),
Movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, first pseudo The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the movable body display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 19-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by performing an effect with a faster impact than the movement of the movable body by means of the pseudo-movable body display.

The game machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo-moving body display (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo-movable object display performs a reaction movement of a predetermined movement amount when moved from a first position (eg, first origin position) to a second position (eg, first effect position) different from the first position. It is a display imitating the movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be performed,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the image The display device 5 can move and display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. some part),
The pseudo-moving body display performs a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement when the movement is displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and is stopped and displayed at the first effect display position;
The specific amount of movement is greater than the predetermined amount of movement (for example, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed when it moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. The moving amount L12 of the reaction motion display is larger than the moving amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounting movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position. 19-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display makes it possible to pseudo-realize a performance similar to that of the movable object without mounting the movable object, and at the same time, the reaction occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the action in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The game machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the first pseudo-moving body display a portion where Z100 can be moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position;
a movable body that can move from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounting movable body 32 that can move from the origin position to the rendering position);
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
A pseudo-moving body display effect for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the second display position). 1 part that can be moved and displayed to the effect display position),
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 can move the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position);
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable object effect is not executed in the predetermined period. The ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed (for example, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development using the mounted movable body 32 When the performance A and the development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the game is controlled to be in a big win game state more than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed. percentage (big hit expectation) is high. See Figure 19-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable body display effect.

The game machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display the second pseudo-moving body display a portion where Z200 can be moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position;
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result to be a big hit) that suggests that the pseudo movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state, and
A notification effect (for example, a development effect B that notifies that the game will develop into a strong super reach effect) for informing the player of advantageous contents;
A predetermined effect (e.g., development effect B Development suggestion production that suggests the possibility of being executed) and
is executable and
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable object display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) with different expectations for the execution of the notification effect,
The display means is
In the special suggestive effect, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying from the second display position to the first display position, and then hiding ( 19-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after displaying the pseudo movable object display at the second display position, it is hidden without moving from the second display position to the first display position (Fig. 19-26 (A ) to (J), see FIG. 19-27 (A)),
Before executing the notification effect and when hiding the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position, the notification related image (for example, Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 19-26 (F) to (J) and FIG. 19-27 (A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special suggestive effect, the pseudo-movable object display is displayed moving in the same way as the movable object as a structure, so attention is paid to whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display in the same manner as the movable body, and the display position is not returned from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is hidden, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion to execute the notification effect.

The game machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first initial display a portion that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, and a portion that can be moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position); ,
Production execution means capable of executing production (for example, production control CPU 120),
with
The production executing means is
A special effect (for example, a decision effect to notify whether or not to be controlled to a big hit game state) that informs that it is controlled to the advantageous state;
A specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed (for example, a development effect B that informs that the effect will be executed after developing into a strong super reach effect);
is executable and
The display means is
In the specific effect and the special effect, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then from the second display position to the first display. It is hidden without being moved to a position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special effect (for example, the state at the start of display of the ready-to-win title image Z51) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. possible (see FIGS. 19-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display in the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then from the second display position to the first display. Move it to a position and then hide it (see FIGS. 19-30 (A) to (F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the display of the suggestive image is prioritized from the second display position to the second display position rather than the display of the pseudo movable body moving in the same manner as the movable body as a structure. Since it is not displayed without returning to the first display position, the player can be made to pay attention to the suggestion of execution of the special effect, and in the special effect, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the same way as the movable object. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the notification of advantageous contents without making the player feel uncomfortable.

The game machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
Display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-moving body display from the first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first initial display A portion that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position),
The display means is
moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position);
Movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (FIG. 19-40 (A) to (C)),
A specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo-moving object display in the display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position (for example, an image showing a plurality of broken glass pieces due to cracked glass) Effect image Z71) in which Z71A scatters can be displayed (see FIGS. 19-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving quickly without lowering the visibility, and the moving display can be favorably impressed on the player by emphasizing the moving display with the specific image. can.

The game machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo-moving body display including a first pseudo-moving body display and a second pseudo-moving body display different from the first pseudo-moving body display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-moving body The display Z100 can be moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the image display device 5 can move the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. movable displayable part),
The first pseudo movable object display can be displayed by moving from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 19-16 (B)),
The second pseudo movable object display can be displayed by moving from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 19-16(C)),
The display means is
Moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, the first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 19-40 (A) to (C) ),
The moving display of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame. (See FIGS. 19-40 (A) to (C)),
Movement display of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and movement display of the second pseudo movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200. to the first specific effect display position (see FIGS. 19-40),
When the first pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo-movable object display moves from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The ratio of control to the advantageous state differs depending on when it is displayed (for example, in the announcement effect B, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position When PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4, which is displayed by moving from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is different when the pattern PBY-1 moved and displayed to the display position and the pattern PBY-2 moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position are executed. 19-10 and 19-20 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-moving object display and the second pseudo-moving object display is moved and displayed. A player can be made to recognize the display of the movable object and the display of the second pseudo-movable object by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

The gaming machine of form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 7,
A movable body (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100) movable from a first position (e.g., first origin position) to a second position (e.g., first rendering position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a constant amount of reaction movement is performed (see FIGS. 19-36),
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 19-36),
The specific amount of movement is larger than the certain amount of movement (for example, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first The moving amount L12 of the reaction motion display is larger than the moving amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounting movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position. 19-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display makes it possible to pseudo-realize a performance similar to that of the movable object without mounting the movable object, and at the same time, the reaction occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the action in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 8,
A movable body (e.g., mounting movable body 32) movable from a first position (e.g., origin position) to a second position (e.g., performance position) different from the first position,
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (for example, movement display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (for example, movement distance L1) (Fig. 19-16),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the pseudo-moving object display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the moving object, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 9,
The pseudo movable body display includes a performance display section (for example, performance display sections Z100A and Z200A) and a mechanism display section (for example, mechanism display sections Z100B and Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position before the effect display unit (see FIGS. 19-36 (B1) and (B2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 10,
Movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, first pseudo movable body display) The amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32 (see FIGS. 19-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 11,
The moving period between the first position and the second position of the movable body includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (Fig. 19-39 (A )reference),
the movement display period of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 19-39 (B));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 12,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (for example, light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of luminous display of the luminous display section when the quasi-movable body display Z100 is moved to the second display position. After the display is moved to the performance position, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle (see FIG. 19-31 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo-movable object display moved and displayed at the second display position.

The gaming machine of form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 13,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (for example, light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not emit light to display the light-emitting display unit when moving and displaying the pseudo-movable object display (see FIGS. 19-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo-moving object display inconspicuous during the moving display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of form 15 is the gaming machine according to form 13 or 14,
The movable body includes a light-emitting portion capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display portions Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed at the second display position, the display means performs light emission display of the light emission display section in a manner common to light emission of the light emission section (effect control CPU 120, After moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first rendering position, the part where the light emission of the mounted movable body LED208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle (see Fig. 19-31(D)) ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 17,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can display the second pseudo movable body display. A portion where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
a direction in which the pseudo-moving object display moves from the first display position to the second display position; a direction in which the pseudo-moving object display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position; are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the notice effect A, and the notice effect B is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position (see FIGS. 19-33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, one pseudo-movable object display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable object.

The gaming machine of form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of forms 1 to 16,
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a different direction. can be moved and displayed (see Fig. 19-43);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko game machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko game machine) will be described.

(Structure of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 9 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronism with the first special game or the second special game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, vertically direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the variable display of the special game and the decoration pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to simply as the variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2, a first suspension indicator 25A and a second suspension indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first pending display 25A displays the first pending memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second pending display 25B displays the number of second pending memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 11). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

Predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, three positions on the lower left side of the game area and one position above the variable winning ball device 6B) are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable prize winning ball device 7 has a special prize winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11), and the special prize winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special prize winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize in a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 9, the left lower part of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Below the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above configuration, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the frame 3 for a game machine. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the game machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. As shown in FIG.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 9), a mounting movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided which operates according to the performance. Further, the mounting movable body 32 is provided with a movable body ramp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c are collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9 in some cases. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d include LEDs.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (hit ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 11).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 11).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

10 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. A main substrate 11 housed in a substrate case 201 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁A setting key 51 and a setting switch 52 are provided on the main substrate 11 . The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 , such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 .

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11 , and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29 . The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the gaming machine frame 3 opened.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, role ratios, and bases. Consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls in the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls awarded to the second starting prize opening (electric chew) and the number of prize balls awarded to the large prize opening (attacker). The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1 when it is in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display setting values to be changed or checked when in the setting change state or setting confirmation state.

The setting key 51 and the setting switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting keys 51 and the setting changeover switches 52 from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including short pieces 50Aa and long pieces 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Overview of Game Progress)
A game ball is shot toward a game area by a player's rotating operation of a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern lost pattern) other than the normal pattern winning pattern is stop-displayed as the fixed normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern lost". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running or during the period when it is controlled to the jackpot game state described later (starting winning occurs, but it is based on the starting winning If the special game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing". Incidentally, the "loss" in the pachinko game machine 1 includes a "time-saving loss" that is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time-saving state) without going through the big win game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc.) are prepared, and the jackpot type is set according to these It is As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type with which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type with few prize balls, or a jackpot type with which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a predetermined return after power-on, such as when the system is reset) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are provided. lighting or extinguishing, the operation of the mounting movable body 32, or a performance using any performance device including a part or all of these.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the image display device 5, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative design is also called the probability variable design, and the even-numbered decorative design is also called the non-probable variable design (normal design). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special game is "lost", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" (Also referred to as non-reach lost") may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach lost"). In addition, when the display result is "lost", after the mode of variable display of decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of variable display of decorative patterns is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("no reach") that is not a big hit combination. ”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes “reach lost”).

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in FIG. 11, for example. In addition, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, and a launch control substrate are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 . Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but are also configured to implement specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on electronic circuit boards. It is a concept that includes an electronic circuit mounting board that has been manufactured.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17 , and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an alternating current power supply such as AC 100 V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is switched to the power supply board 17 . It can be supplied to electrical parts including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage into a specific DC voltage (eg, 12 V DC or 5 V DC), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection (gate switch 21, starter switch (first starter switch 22A and second starter switch 22B), count switch 23) (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 takes in a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100 . The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of the control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either the power supply monitoring circuit, the IC with built-in watchdog timer, or the system reset IC. I wish I had. The power-off signal turns off when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is equal to or less than the predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

A display monitor 29 , a display changeover switch 31 , a setting key 51 , a setting changeover switch 52 , and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main substrate 11 . The door open sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the mounted movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the mounting movable body 32 to the mounting movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the mounting movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Sound output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signal, lamp signal, etc.), and control of mounted movable body 32 (supply of signal for operating mounted movable body 32, etc.) are performed by effect control CPU 120. may be executed.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described.

(Major operations of the main substrate 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 12, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, for example, if a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in an ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100 . If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the restoration condition is not established. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102 serving as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery condition can be established.

If the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), after executing the restoration process (step S4), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. The work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 by the recovery process in step S4. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state when the power supply is stopped can be restored. It is sufficient if the pattern variation can be restarted.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the initialization process (step S6) is performed, and then the setting change process (step S7) is performed. The initialization processing in step S6 includes clear processing for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear processing.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is established, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition including the clear signal being in the OFF state is satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the setting confirmation state is entered in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed, and the main board 11 sets the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29 . When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in a game stop state to stop the progress of the game. When the game is in the stopped state, shooting of game balls by operating the batted ball operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbols are stopped. The display device 20 may be controlled so as to stop display of the winning symbols or the like, or display corresponding to the game stop state different from the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not a predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is on.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting change state is set in which the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 can be changed, and the main board 11 sets to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical values displayed on the display monitor 29 are sequentially updated and displayed. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a game hall staff member or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is updated. turn off the When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 .

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be put in the game stop state as in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state associated therewith should also end.

On the effect control board 12 side, when a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command is received, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being checked or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17, for example. Therefore, if the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the step The setting change process of S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 to enable control to the setting confirmation state. If the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is off when the power supply is started, or if the setting key 51 is off, and if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery processing of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 13 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, so that the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110, and It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, execution and suspension management of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 13 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of pre-reading and judging the display result and the variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. will be The effect control command at the time of starting winning set to be transmitted in this manner is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be a "big hit" and the type of the big hit in the case of a "big hit" are determined by the display result. is determined (predetermined) before is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (either a big hit symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 10 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of a plurality of variation patterns using a random number value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination of whether or not the display result is a "big hit". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "missing", when it is controlled in the time saving state or the variable probability state, and when the end of the number of cuts is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the rate of winning balls are changed according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the probability of winning a big hit and the rate of winning balls are changed. For example, the setting value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, and 6 is the highest probability of winning the big win, and the probability of winning the big win decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 as the value decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, the advantage for the player is the highest, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the advantage in stages. . If the winning probability of the big win changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the winning probability of the big win is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the big win game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so as to be able to set one of a plurality of set values with different degrees of advantage for the player. The set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the main board 11 side to the effect control board 12 side.

FIG. 15 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 15(A) shows a configuration example of the first special figure display result determination table used when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. It shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used when it is a figure. A display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101 . In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random number MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number MR1 is a random number for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated within the range of 0-65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 15 (A), when the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65535 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. It should be noted that when the set value of the first special figure is 2 to 6 and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15(A).

As shown in FIG. 15 (B), when the fluctuation special figure is the second special figure, the set value is 1 and when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, in the range of 0 to 65535 It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and 65317 to 65425 are "with time saving "missing" and other numerical ranges are assigned to "missing". In addition, when the set value is 1 and the game state is a variable probability state, among the above-mentioned hit determination values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss" assigned. In addition, for the case where the variable special figure has a set value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is as shown in FIG. 15 (B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit determination value assigned to "big hit" or "loss with time reduction" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the big hit determination values for determining the big hit regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, common While only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range among the jackpot determination values. A number within the range is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the first special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6, with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65535 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. Set to a common numeric range.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 to setting In the case of value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for the setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for the setting value 3, the range 1347 to 1487 for the setting value 4, and the range 1347 to 1556 for the setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1347 to 1674, respectively.

That is, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is a variable probability state, if the set value is 1, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot determination values, the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the reference as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

In the second special figure display result determination table in the case where the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining the big hit regardless of the set value. is set to a common numeric range for

In addition, when the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value for judging the jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to the "jackpot"), while the set value 2 In the case of set value 6, a numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as a non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the big hit determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot determination value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range from 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range from 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range from 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , and set value 6 are set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, when the set value is 1, the value can be in the range of 0 to 65535 Of the hit judgment values, only numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, the common numerical range Numbers within the range plus the non-common number range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a big hit increases as the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the judgment value of the big hit (jackpot reference value). go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 of the hit determination values determines the time saving loss regardless of the set value It is set to the common numerical range of the deviation judgment value with time saving. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, as described above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value, and with time saving The deviation determination value is in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit determination value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), with 65317 as a reference value for loss with time reduction (reference value for loss with time reduction), in the range of 65317 to 65425 Since it is set, it is prevented that the numerical range of the loss determination value with time saving is overlapped with the range of the big hit determination value which changes according to each set value.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the game state is the variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value. set in the range. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as those of the first special figure display result determination table.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the set value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set in the common numerical range with time reduction and the deviation is the second special symbol, when the game state is the normal state and the time reduction state, the set value Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range for time saving. In other words, when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is not with the time saving is a common rate for any set value, so the gambling property depending on the set value can be prevented from becoming excessively high. In addition, for time-saving loss to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each set value, since it is set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving loss reference value, in any setting value, variable display It is possible to reduce the processing load of the CPU 103 regarding the determination of the result as being out of time saving.

In this pachinko game machine 1, the number of setting values that can be set is 6 from 1 to 6, but the number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Also, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the set value based on the assignment of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at different ratios according to the set values based on the assignment of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined with a common ratio regardless of the set value. A set value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by having the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differ according to a set value. Alternatively, regardless of the setting value, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach may be common. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different ratios according to the set values.

(Major operations of production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 17 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for initial operation of the movable mounting body 32, such as control for driving the movable mounting body 32 to return it to the origin position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the mounting movable body Control for operating various production devices such as driving operation of 32 is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 17 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 18, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S175 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the mounting movable body 32, outputting a sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal) Various effect control during the variable display of the decoration pattern, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, is executed by the output of . After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving a performance control command designating the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4". Further, when the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed without receiving the command designating the start of the jackpot game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the production process flag is set. is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. In the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is the value corresponding to the ending production process. ”, and ends the effect processing during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing programs and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, one of them may have a ratio of “0%” and the other may have a ratio of “100%” or less than “100%”.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characterizing portion 241SG in the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 19-1 to 19-40. It should be noted that, in the following description, configurations that are the same as the pachinko game machine 1 explained in the basic explanation, or that have the same functions as those of the pachinko game machine 1 although they are different in form, layout, etc., are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations thereof are omitted. Differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be mainly explained.

As shown in FIG. 19-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 as the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounting movable body 32 is formed slightly larger than the mounting movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19-2, the effect control board 12 is connected with a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. is possible. A button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the effect control CPU 120 can turn on/off the button LED 62.

FIG. 19-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, where the first byte indicates MODE (class of command) and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The leading bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the leading bit of EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 19-3(A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 19-3 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that designates the start of variable display in the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special design in the special game. It is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a design (also referred to as a production design). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value that is arbitrarily set according to the contents of instructions by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data are set according to the specified variation pattern.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special design or a decorative design. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-3(B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also called variable display result) is "loss", "big hit" or "minor hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (predetermined result) or the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of a plurality of types of jackpot types when the variable display result is "big hit".

Among the variable display result specifying commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 19-3(B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result specifying command indicating the predetermined result that the variable display result is "no". . The command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specifying command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "unprobable variable big hit". The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be a "minor hit".

The command 8F00H is a pattern confirmation command for designating the stoppage (confirmation) of the decorative patterns in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5 . The command 95XXH is a game state designation command that designates the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state designation command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is the time saving control. It is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, short working time state) in which probability variation control is not performed while being performed. In addition, the command 9502H is the third game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) where the time saving control is not performed while the probability change control is performed, and the command 9503H is time saving control and probability change It is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to the game state (high-probability-high base state, time-saving probability-variable state) in which control is performed together.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is resumed after the power supply is temporarily stopped. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure restoration designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise designates initialization. Send command.

The command A0XXH is a winning start designation command (also referred to as "fanfare command") for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big winning game or a small winning game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is open in the jackpot gaming state. The command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the big winning opening to notify that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big winning game state. The command A3XXH is a win end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of a big win game or a small win.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after opening the big winning opening, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10") to be described later, Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that a game ball passing through (entering) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting winning (first starting winning) occurs. It is a first start winning designation command for notifying that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball passing through (entering) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) occurs. , It is a second start winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure reserved storage number. Command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure pending storage number in order to be able to specify the special figure pending storage number. The first pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied, when the first starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied, when the second starting opening winning designation command is transmitted , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of reserved memories decreases), the special game It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution or the like.

Instead of the first reserved storage number notification command and the second reserved storage number notification command, a total reserved storage number notification command for notifying the total reserved storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to report an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number.

The command D100 is a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying the execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect, and as will be described later, is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the special symbol normal processing. This is a command transmitted according to the demonstration display setting, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration specification command, the customer waiting demonstration effect is executed.

Note that the commands shown in FIG. 19-3(A) are only examples, and some of these commands may be omitted, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You can add commands that are different from the commands in For example, a prize ball number notification command for specifying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball entering each prize hole, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. You may make it provide the notification command etc. which notify the remaining frequency|count of a passage notification command, probability variation control, and time saving control to be performed.

FIG. 19-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 19-4, on the side of the main board 11, the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data indicating each random number MR4 for is controlled to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data representing part or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. As will be described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit set in the RAM 102, and updates various numerical data by software, Numerical data representing part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number MR1 for special figure display result determination is a random number used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as the special figure in the special figure game as "big win" to the big win game state. It takes a value in the range from "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is any one of "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", "variable jackpot C", and "variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". is a random value used to determine , and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number used to determine one of a plurality of types prepared in advance for the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. 997”.

The random number MR4 for judging the result of normal pattern display is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal pattern display device 20 in the normal pattern display is "win" or "lose". It is a random number that can be set, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 19-5 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM101. In the present embodiment, as the special figure display result determination table, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state is determined based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination. It is a referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for special figure display result judgment is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" or "loss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data showing the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result judgment is whether or not to control the special figure display result as "big hit" to the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more determination values than when it is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), It is assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot". As a result, in the variable probability state (high probability state) where the variable probability control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as "big hit" and controlled to the big hit game state. Then, compared to the determined probability (approximately 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as "jackpot" to the jackpot game state becomes higher (approximately 1 in the present embodiment /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probability variable state (high probability state), it is determined to control to a big hit game state compared to when it is a normal state or a time saving state. Judgment data is assigned to the decision result as to whether or not to control to the jackpot game state so that the probability of winning is increased.

In addition, FIG. 19-5 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for special symbol display result determination whether or not to control the variable display result to a small winning game state as a "small win". is a table referenced for In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state) or a probability variable state (high probability state), A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data showing the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is whether or not to control the special figure display result to the small hit game state as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" differs between the first special figure game and the second special figure. there is Specifically, in the case of the special game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value is assigned. Therefore, as described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control In the high base state where the winning to the mouth occurs and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, the "small hit" almost does not occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the prize winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of small hits in which a large number of game balls cannot be acquired, thereby preventing the game interest from deteriorating.

FIG. 19-6(A) shows a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. The big hit type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control to the big hit game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", based on the random number MR2 for judging the big hit type, any of a plurality of types of the big hit type. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether In the big hit type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second 2 special symbol display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number MR2 for judging the type of jackpot is "non-probability variable jackpot", "probability variable jackpot A", " It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots, such as "probability variable big hit B" and "probability variable big hit C".

Here, the jackpot type in the present embodiment will be described using FIG. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and shift to a high probability high base state, and high probability low base state in which high probability control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state but time saving control is not executed. There are set a "probability variable big hit C" to shift and a "non-probability variable big hit" to shift to a low probability high base state by executing only time saving control after the end of the big win game state.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. On the other hand, the big-hit game state by the "probability variable big-hit B" is a normal open big-hit game in which five rounds (so-called five rounds) are repeated to change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . In addition, the big win game state by the "non-probability variable big win" is a normal open big win in which 10 rounds (so-called 10 rounds) of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeated. . Therefore, the "variable probability big hit A" may be called a 10 round (10R) variable probability big hit, and the "variable probability big hit B" may be called a 5 round (5R) probability variable big hit. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on the "probability variable jackpot C", two rounds (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed, and a special game is played in each round. It is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter than other jackpot games (for example, 0.1 seconds). In addition, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, the variable probability control and the time saving control are not executed.

In addition, although not shown in the figure, the small winning game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous for the player, and the opening time is the same as the probability variable big win C. It is an open period (0.1 second in this embodiment). In addition, after the end of the small winning game, the game state immediately before the small winning game is taken over.

That is, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to be "probability variable big hit C" or "small hit", variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 19-7) In addition, as a result of the variable display, the chance number is stopped and displayed, and furthermore, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same. Since it is impossible to distinguish whether it is a ``variable probability big win C'' in which the variable probability control is executed or a ``minor win'' in which the previous game state is continued without executing the variable probability control, the variable probability big win C cannot be distinguished. After the end of the big win game or the small win game, the game can be continued while making the player expect that the variable probability control is executed.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the big win game state of the variable probability big win A and the variable probability big win B are continuously executed until the big win occurs again after the end of the big win game state. Therefore, when the regenerated big win is the variable probability big win A or the variable probability big win B, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the big win game state is ended, so that the big win game state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called continuous state, which occurs continuously.

On the other hand, the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state by the "non-probable variable jackpot" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times The game ends when a big win game state is entered before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-6 (A), depending on whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure, "probability variable jackpot A", " Allocation of determination values to the jackpot types of "probability variable jackpot B", "probability variable jackpot C", and "non-probability variable jackpot" is different. That is, if the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (the value in the range of "81" to "100") has a small number of rounds "variable hit B" or "variable probability While assigned to the jackpot type of "jackpot C", when the special figure displayed variably is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. , the ratio of determining the jackpot type to the "probability variable big hit B" or "probability variable big hit C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is controlled to the normal opening jackpot state or the high-speed opening jackpot state with a small number of rounds by setting the jackpot type to ``probable variable jackpot B'' or ``probable variable jackpot C''. Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the frequent occurrence of a jackpot state in which there are few prize balls to be obtained is avoided. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 19-6 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-variable" jackpot type is the first special figure special figure game or the second special figure Since it is the same regardless of whether it is a non-variable jackpot or a definite variable jackpot, the probability is the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as described above, depending on whether the allocation of the determination value for "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C" is different depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or a second special figure In addition, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probable variable jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set to be easier to determine in the case of the special game of the special figure than in the case of the first special figure of the special game.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special game of the first special figure is the "variable probability big hit B" or "variable probability big hit C". You may make it assign to a classification. For example, in the case of the special game of the second special, the judgment value less than that of the special game of the first special is the big hit type of "probable variable big hit B" or "probable variable big hit C". may be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether the game is the special game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 19-6 shows variation patterns in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "missing", the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance so as to correspond to cases where the display result is a "big win" or a "minor win". In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach loss variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "lost" and the variation display mode of the decoration pattern is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach loss variation pattern"). Also, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similar to the super reach fluctuation pattern, normal reach α, normal reach β, . , a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Also, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one type of super reach variation pattern may be used as in the normal reach variation pattern.

In addition, the variation pattern in the present embodiment includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 19-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach production of normal reach in the present embodiment is executed is set shorter than the super reach variation pattern. Further, among the variation patterns of super reach, the variation patterns of super reach β and super reach γ have a variable display period (60 seconds) longer than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the variation pattern of super reach α. It is

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns, for example, the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, the type of super reach, etc., the type of the fluctuation pattern is determined first. Then, the variation pattern to be executed is not determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, but is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of variation pattern is provided, and from the random value for determining the type of variation pattern After determining the type of the variation pattern first, the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 19-8 is an explanatory diagram of the determination method of the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is changed according to the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (A), if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot) and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A Determine from In addition, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and variation is performed using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot) and PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (A), in the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is different. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. assigned. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern of super reach is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Since the super reach β is easier to determine than the super reach α, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the present embodiment, since the variable display is executed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for loss, Using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss, the fluctuation pattern is PA1-1 (non-reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α fluctuation pattern) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α deviation) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, when the variable display result is "loss" in the normal game state (low base state), and the number of pending memories of the variation special figure is 4, the variation pattern determination table C for loss is selected, and the loss Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach deviation) and PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α deviation) and PA2 -3 (fluctuation pattern of deviation of super reach β).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, when the variable display result is "missing" in the present embodiment, the special figure variable display time is normal based on the number of pending memories of the variable special figure being 3 or 4 etc. Since the ratio of execution of variable display is increased by the shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) shorter than the non-reach-out variation pattern (PA1-1), the game is prevented from being slowed down. At the same time, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (B), when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the high base state, the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the big hit variation pattern determination table A is selected. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot) and PB1-4 (super reach γ It is determined from the variation pattern of the jackpot). Further, when the variable display result is the probability variable big win A or the probability variable big win B in the low base state, the big win variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using the big win variation pattern determination table B PB1-1. Determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot) and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot) .

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 19-8 (B), in the big hit variation pattern determination table A and the big hit variation pattern determination table B, the determination values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 have different quotas. Specifically, in the big hit variation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. 250 decision values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the big hit variation pattern determination table B, 50 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. , PB1-4 are assigned 400 decision values. That is, in the present embodiment, when the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is the non-probability variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern is easily determined, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

Also, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special hit variation pattern determination table, and use the special hit variation pattern determination table to set the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern). That is, in the present embodiment, since the variable display is executed in the same variation pattern when the variable display result is the probability variable big win C and when the variable display result is the small win, the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable probability big win C or a small win.

Also, if the variable display result is "loss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for deviation, and use the variation pattern determination table D for deviation to determine the variation pattern PA1-4 (Shortening fluctuation pattern for non-reach out of time), PA2-1 (variation pattern out of normal reach), PA2-2 (variation pattern out of super reach α) and PA2-3 (variation pattern out of super reach β) and PA2 -4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ deviation).

Specifically, in the deviation variation pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. 10 decision values are assigned to PA2-3 and 7 decision values are assigned to PA2-4.

That is, in the present embodiment, if the variable display result in the high base state (time saving state) is "missing", based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time normal non-reach deviation variation Since the rate of execution of the variable display is increased by the shortening variation pattern (PA1-4) shorter than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display result is displayed next while preventing the game from being slowed down. It is possible to shorten the period until a big hit is achieved. Incidentally, the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are fluctuation patterns that can be executed only in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 . The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure reservation storage unit, a second special figure reservation storage unit, a general figure reservation storage unit, a game control flag setting unit, a game control timer setting unit, and a game A control counter setting section and a game control buffer setting section are provided.

In the first special figure reservation storage unit, the game ball passes (enters) the first start prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A, and although the start prize (first start prize) has occurred, the special figure that has not yet been started It stores the pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the first start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the stored number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

The second special figure reservation storage unit is a special feature that has not yet started although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start prize opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and the start prize (second start prize) has occurred. The pending data of the figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit is associated with the reservation number in the order of winning to the second start winning opening (the order of detection of the game ball), and the establishment of the second start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball Random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and numerical data indicating random number MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted from random number circuit 104 etc. by CPU 103 based on is reserved data. , until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game ) to make it possible to determine whether or not it will be a big hit.

In addition, hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning hole, and the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning hole The suspension information (second suspension information) based on the establishment of the second starting prize by chance may be stored in association with the suspension number in the common suspension storage unit. In this case, the starting opening data indicating which of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the holding information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern reservation storage part stores the reservation information of the normal pattern game which is not yet started by the normal pattern display device 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21.例文帳に追加For example, the general pattern reservation storage unit associates the game ball with the reservation number in the order in which it passed through the passage gate 41, and determines the general pattern display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. is stored as reserved data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

Various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 are provided in the game control timer setting section. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update it by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, a random number that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data representing the random numbers MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and periodically according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random number is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be software for updating the random count value separately from the numeric data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be software extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 . For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the production control board 12 shown in FIG. 19-2 is provided with a production control data holding area as an area for holding various data used for controlling the production operation. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting portion, a performance control timer setting portion, a performance control counter setting portion, and a performance control buffer setting portion.

The effect control flag setting unit includes a plurality of types of effect operation states, such as the display state of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, and states that can be updated according to effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the ON state or the OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used for controlling the progress of various effect operations such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The production control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various production operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed by the first special figure reserved storage, the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1 corresponding to the reserved storage 1 to 4 of the first special figure -4, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed by the second special figure pending storage, buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the second special figure pending storage 1 to 4 The data constituting the receive command buffer at the time of start winning, which is associated with each, is set with entries that can store data such as start winning designation commands, symbol designation commands, variable category commands, pending memory number notification commands, etc. It is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting section. When there is a start prize to the first start prize mouth or the second start prize mouth, start mouth prize designation command (first start mouth prize designation command or second start mouth prize designation command), pattern designation command, variation category designation Four commands, a command and a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command), are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as one set. Then, the four commands of the start winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending storage number notification command, which constitute one set, are the buffer numbers corresponding to the starting gate winning designation command and the pending storage number notification command. is stored in the entry of

The storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to the buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure are the highest reserved storage (buffer number "1-1") when the start condition is satisfied. ) is shifted upward one by one as will be described later. , It is designed to be cleared in the special figure per waiting process that is executed when ending the variable display. Similarly, the storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to the buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure are the highest pending storage (buffer number "2 -1"), the variable display of the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later, and the buffer number "2-0" storing the content of the pending memory for which the start condition is satisfied. The stored contents are cleared in the special figure per waiting process executed when ending the variable display.

The effect control CPU 120, at the time of start winning to the first start winning port, sends a command at the beginning of the empty entry of the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 of the receive command buffer at the time of start winning (the lowest buffer number entry), and at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening, store from the head (the entry with the smallest buffer number) of the empty entries among the buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. . At the time of starting winning, from the starting opening winning designation command to the reservation storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, if the command is received, the starting entrance winning designation command , pattern designation command, variation category designation command, and reserved storage number notification command.

The command stored in the received command buffer at the time of start winning is the entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- 0”) is deleted and stored in the entry (entry corresponding to buffer number “1-1” or “2-1”) corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started. and the stored contents of entries after the pending storage of the starting variable representation are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decoration pattern of the first special figure reservation storage is completed, each command stored in the buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in the buffer number "1-1" Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". commands stored in areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". be done. Therefore, the buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Production during Super Reach)
Here, the effect during super reach will be described with reference to FIG. 19-9. FIG. 19-9 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 19-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 sets the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode after starting the variable display. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, the super reach effect (weak super reach effect and strong super reach effect) is performed as a variable display effect based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and the super reach effect is performed. After finishing the ready-to-win production, the variable display of the decoration pattern is ended.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120, in the normal reach effect in the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), as an effect different from the variable display effect, the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a big hit It is possible to execute the announcement effect A or the announcement effect B that announces the degree). In addition, in the normal ready-to-win effect in the super ready-to-win variation pattern, it is possible to execute a developing effect A for notifying that the effect will develop into a weak super ready-to-win effect (contents advantageous to the player).

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 is a development effect B that informs that the weak super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) develops into a strong super reach effect (advantageous content for the player). It is possible to execute a development suggestive production that suggests the possibility of being executed, and in the weak super reach production in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach β, γ), develop into a strong super reach production (advantageous for the player content) can be executed.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a determined effect to notify that the variable display result will be a big hit or lose in the strong super reach effect in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ). .

In this way, in the normal reach loss variation pattern, the normal reach production does not develop into a weak super reach production and becomes a big hit or a loss, and in the super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach production is a weak super reach production. In the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach production develops into a strong super reach production.

That is, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reach with higher expectations than weak super reach (jackpot expectation; normal reach < super reach α<super reach β<super reach γ).

In addition, in normal reach and super reach α, β, γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, and common or at least partially similar types of super reach effects may be performed. It may be configured to be executed. Also, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one type, two types, or four or more types.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, in the above-described advance notice effects A and B, development effects A and B, development suggestive effects, and final effects, the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, is moved, and a first pseudo movable body display described later is performed. It is possible to move and display the second pseudo movable body display. Therefore, before describing the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, and the second pseudo-movable body display will be described.

(Flow of pachinko machine development)
First, in order to understand how the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display, the second pseudo-movable body display, etc. as described above, the development of the pachinko machine 1 The outline of the flow of is described based on FIGS. 19-12. 19-12 are explanatory diagrams outlining the flow of development of pachinko gaming machines.

As shown in Fig. 19-12, when the development of a given pachinko game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) starts, the first step is to clarify what to convey to the game parlors and players and what they want the players to feel. A written proposal is created (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game contents, highlights, specs, game flow, production structure such as reach, board structure, movable bodies (structures), etc. are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (primary prototype, design mockup) of the board surface (game board), images and materials that can be used to visualize variable displays, specifications confirmation tables, and the like are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but there were reasons why multiple movable bodies could not be mounted (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc.) durability) may occur.

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the production image, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that occurred in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display image that imitates this non-mounted movable body is created. . In addition, since the movement display in the pseudo movable body display is less impactful than the case of moving the non-mounted movable body, for example, when the movement display is stopped, the reaction display operation and the movement display speed It is often displayed deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board surface (game board) including images such as variable display and effects is created, and the variable display, core effects, movements of movable bodies, etc. are confirmed (step 241SGS004), If there is no problem, the board surface (game board) is produced (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by mounting a plurality of movable bodies capable of providing an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be enhanced and the presentation can be diversified. It is often difficult to mount multiple Therefore, based on the design and operation of a movable body that could not be mounted, a moving display of a pseudo-movable body display simulating this non-mounted movable body is often used.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko game machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, it was planned to mount a plurality of movable bodies in the development stage, but due to the various problems described above, one movable body ( For example, the mounting movable body 32) was determined to be mounted, and the other movable bodies (for example, the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200) were not determined to be mounted and were not mounted. Instead of the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display simulating the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200 are simulated. It is assumed that the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display is adopted.

In the above description, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which are finally not mounted. It is not limited, and although it was possible to mount a movable body, there are cases where pseudo-movable body display is used to diversify the production. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable object display simulating a movable object that is not planned to be installed in the development stage (for example, a virtual movable object or a movable object that is or will be installed in another model).

(Mounting movable body 32)
The mounting movable body 32 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 19-13. 19-13, (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram for explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 19-13(A), the mounting movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A, which is formed in a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and whose front surface is decorated, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism portion 32B extending to the left and right sides are respectively supported by the driving mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, whereby the upper origin position (FIG. 19-13 (A )) and an effect position below the origin position (the position indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 19-13A). The mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the effect section 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L and 201R include mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, drive gears 203L and 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R, and driven gears 204L and 204R meshing with the drive gears 203L and 203R. , driven gears 204L and 204R fixed to the lower ends of rotating shafts 205L and 205R directed in the vertical direction, movable bodies 206L and 206R inserted into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, and mounting movable body 32 are held at the origin position. It mainly has mounting movable body solenoids 207L and 207R that can be mounted, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 19-2) that is built in the rendering section 32A and that can emit a light emitting section 208A consisting of the letter "X".

The mounting movable body 32 has left and right end portions (guided portions) of the mechanism portion 32B inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and engaged with the mounting movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. is held at the origin position. When the mounting movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the locked state is released while the mounting movable body 32 is held at the origin position, the mounting movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position by its own weight, and left and right ends of the mechanism section 32B. contacts the moving bodies 206L and 206R to restrict downward movement, thereby stopping at the performance position.

A spiral groove portion 205A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion 205A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the moving bodies 206L and 206R. and rotation around the rotation shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotation shafts 205L and 205R can be moved forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the rendering position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. , 205R are rotated to lift the movable bodies 206L and 206R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R are lifted from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-14. 19-14, (A) is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the display of the first pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

The first pseudo movable object display Z100 shown in FIG. 19-14(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIG. 19-14(B), but was not installed due to various circumstances. It is an image imitating the first non-mounting movable body M100.

The first non-mounting movable body M100 which is not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a front view and decorated on the front surface, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism portion M100B extending to the left is supported by the drive mechanism M101 arranged on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 19-14(B)) 19-14(B)) and a first rendering position below the first origin position (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 19-14(B)).

The drive mechanism M101 includes a movable motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, and a driven gear M104 fixed to the lower end facing the vertical direction. A rotating shaft M105, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounting movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and built in the effect section M100A, as viewed from the front. It mainly has a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting a circular light emitting portion M108A.

In addition, the production section M100A has four production movable sections M110A to M110D which are arranged around the light emitting section M108A, and which are arranged in the vicinity of the light emitting section M108A. 19-14(B), and a second effect state in which the effect movable parts M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting part M108A.

The first non-mounting movable body M100 is inserted (guided) into the rotating shaft M105 so that the left end (guided part) of the mechanism part M100B is movable in the vertical direction, and is locked by the movable body solenoid M107. 1 It is held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while being held at the first origin position and the locked state is released, the first non-mounting movable body M100 drops from the first origin position by its own weight, and the mechanism part M100B. The left and right ends of the contact with the moving body M106 restricts its downward movement, thereby stopping at the first effect position.

A helical groove portion M105A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shaft M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove portion M105A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the moving body M106, and Since the rotation about the rotating shaft M105 is restricted, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotating shaft M105 in the forward and reverse directions so that it can move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the first non-mounting movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first rendering position by its own weight. By raising it, it rises from the first effect position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 19-14(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100. It has a mechanism display section Z100B corresponding to M100B and a light emitting display section Z108A corresponding to the light emitting section M108A. Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 19-16(B)). ), and can be vertically moved and displayed between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig. 19-17(A)). In addition, the production section M100A has production movable display parts Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the production movable parts M110A to M110D, and a first production display state corresponding to the first production state and a second production display state corresponding to the second production state. It is possible to change to the production display state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-15. 19-15, (A) is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the display of the second pseudo movable body, and (B) is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in FIG. 19-15(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 as shown in FIGS. The image simulates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that is mounted.

Regarding the second non-mounting movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operation modes at the beginning of development (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 19-15 (B) and FIG. 19-15 (C) Mounting plan 2) was devised, but for the convenience of development, the second non-mounting movable body itself could not be mounted. Display and moving display corresponding to mounting plan 2 are made executable.

As shown in FIGS. 19-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 that is not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in a circular shape in front view and decorated on the front surface. A first effect device (mounting plan 1: FIG. 19-15 ( B)), and a second effect device (mounting plan 2: see FIG. 19-15(C)) in which the upper end of the mechanism part M100B is supported by a second driving mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5. is incorporated in each of the

As shown in FIG. 19-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A includes a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, and a rotating body rotated by the movable body motor (not shown). It has M203 and a guide rail M204 that guides the production part M200A so as to be movable in the vertical direction. One end of the mechanism portion M200B is rotatably supported on the base member M202 about a rotation shaft facing in the front-rear direction. A long hole M206 is formed into which it can be inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounting movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A rotates the rotating body M203 by a movable body motor (not shown) and rotates the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis, The first specific origin position below (origin position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 19-15 (B)) and the first specific effect position above the first specific origin position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 19-15 (B)) position).

In addition, the effect part M200A includes a rotating part M207 that is circular in front view, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can emit light from a plurality of (for example, five) light emitting parts M208A to M208E provided in the rotating part M207. , and while the rotating part M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, and the light emitting parts M208A to M208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, 7 colors). there is

19-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B includes a movable motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable motor M212, and a driven gear meshing with the drive gear M213. It mainly has M214 and a rotation shaft M215 directed in the left-right direction to which the driven gear M214 is fixed at the left end. Further, a spiral groove portion M215A is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating shaft M215, while a mechanism portion M200B extending upward from the effect portion M200A is provided on the inner peripheral surface thereof so as to be engaged with the groove portion M215A. A portion (not shown) is formed, and rotation about the rotation axis M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounting movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B rotates the rotating shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, thereby moving the left second specific origin position (FIG. 19-15 (C ) and the second specific effect position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 19-15 (C)), and the second specific origin It can be stopped at a second intermediate effect position between the position and the second specific effect position.

As shown in FIG. 19-15(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounting movable body M200. It has a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to M200B, a rotating display section Z207 corresponding to the rotating section M207, and light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light emitting sections M208A to M208E.

In addition, at the beginning of development, we planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, we were forced to install a single color LED, but the second pseudo movable body display Z200 As a result, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E can emit light in a plurality of colors (for example, seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it is possible to move and display in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (FIGS. 19-16). (C)), it is possible to move and display in the horizontal direction between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (Fig. 19-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounting movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-16 and 19-17. 19-16, (A) shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable object, (B) shows the movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (C) shows the movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display. It is a diagram. 19-17 are diagrams showing (A) the specific movement display area of the first pseudo-moving object display and (B) the specific movement display area of the second pseudo-moving object display.

As shown in FIG. 19-16(A), the mounting movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the effect part 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and the approximate position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is movable in the vertical direction between an effect position where the effect part 32A and the mechanism part 32B overlap at the center, and the movement distance from the origin position to the effect position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 19-16(B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 includes a first initial display position where the lower part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, A first effect display position in which the effect display section Z100A and the mechanism display section Z100B are displayed at a position substantially lower in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 can be vertically moved and displayed, and the first initial display is performed. The movement display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 19-17(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , and a first specific effect display position where the effect display section Z100A and the mechanism display section Z100B are displayed at a substantially central upper position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific effect display position. A specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L2A.

In this manner, the first pseudo movable object display Z100, similarly to the first non-mounting movable object M100, is the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. In addition to being able to move and display the movable range between the two in the vertical direction, it is also possible to move specifically between a second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and a second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be moved and displayed in the vertical direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-16(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is a first specific initial stage in which the lower part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. and a first specific effect display position where the effect display section Z200A and the mechanism display section Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and can be displayed by moving vertically between the display position and the display position, and The movement display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is L3.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-17(B), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is a second specific display in which the right portion of the effect display portion Z200A is displayed at the left portion position of the display area of the image display device 5. It is possible to move and display in the horizontal direction between the initial display position and a second specific effect display position where the effect display section Z200A and the mechanism display section Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5. , the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounting movable body M200, has a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific effect corresponding to the first specific effect position. In addition to being able to move and display the movable range between the display positions in the vertical direction, a second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and a second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position A specific movable range between the positions can be moved and displayed in the horizontal direction.

Further, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. (L2>L1>L3). Further, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. or longer than the movement display distance L2A (L3A>L2A>L1).

Thus, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can move and display movement display distances (L2, L2A, L3A) longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect with more impact than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIGS. 19-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of effect display portions Z100A and Z200A and mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B, and mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B. is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the driving mechanism M101, the first driving mechanism M201A, and the second driving mechanism M201B, which are arranged on the side of the image display device 5, produce effects. Since the display parts Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to express moving display more realistically.

That is, the pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) refers to movable objects such as movable objects mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, movable objects not mounted, virtual movable objects, etc., as structures that can be operated by the drive mechanism. It is an imitation display, and is different from an image without a mechanism display section such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 19-25(H)).

In addition, display in which a part of the display mode is different from the modeled movable body, display in a mode that cannot be realized with the modeled movable body (for example, deformed display, deformation display, etc.), movement display (for example, high-speed movement display, etc.) ) is possible.

In addition, the pseudo-moving object display (pseudo-moving object image) may be an image or moving image created by a computer or the like, or an image or moving image of an actually created movable object as a structure. There may be. Furthermore, when the pseudo-moving object display is displayed, a sound effect that is the same as or similar to the sound effect that is output when the movable object is moving or the impact sound that is generated when the moving object is stopped is output, or the pseudo-moving object display is produced. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, the stick controller 31A, or the like, or the loud bass is output from the speakers 8L, 8R to generate a pseudo-impact. It is possible to provide a performance to the player.

Next, details of various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-10. FIGS. 19-10 are diagrams for explaining the contents and configurations of various effects in super ready-to-win.

(Notice production A)
As shown in FIG. 19-10, the advance notice effect A can be executed in the low base state, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then the first specific effect After being moved to the display position and displayed, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are light-emitting and displayed in a color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, suggesting the possibility (expectation) of a big win.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 19-25 (C) to (F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYA-1 is determined in the advance notice effect A type determination processing of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when the pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light is emitted. The display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, and when the pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when the pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. displayed in red. Therefore, the luminous display color of the luminous display portions Z208A to Z208E with the highest degree of expectation for a big hit is red. The color of the emitted light can be changed in various ways, and when a big win is confirmed, the light may be emitted in gold, rainbow color, or the like.

(Notice production B)
The advance notice effect B can be executed in the high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 changes from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a big hit depending on whether the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. It suggests the possibility (expectation) of becoming

Also, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (Fig. 19-34 (A) ~ (C) reference). Also, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (FIG. 19-34 (D) (See (F)).

Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIG. 19-33). (A) to (C)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (FIG. 19-33). (D)-(F)).

Specifically, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the advance notice effect B type determination process of step 241SGS278A to be described later, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When the pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-3 is determined, the 1 pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when the pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Moves to display position. Therefore, when the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner, the expectation for a big hit is higher than when the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner. The pseudo movable body display Z100 becomes a pattern in which it is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. It is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development production A)
In development effect A, development to weak super reach is announced by moving (falling) the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 19-25 (H)). The mounting movable body 32 moved from the origin position to the performance position rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after the lapse of a predetermined time.

More specifically, when execution is determined in the development effect A type determination processing of step 241SGS278B described later, the mounting movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position at the effect start timing, thereby developing into weak super reach. is reported (see FIG. 19-25 (H)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the mounting movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the timing of starting the effect, and the development to weak super reach is notified by displaying the development notification image Z300 on the image display device 5. (See Figure 19-25 (G)). In other words, the fact that non-execution is determined in the development effect A type determination processing means that the effect pattern is determined to notify the development to weak super reach by displaying the development notification image Z300 without dropping the mounted movable body 32. is.

Note that the development notification image Z300 is an image (display) imitating the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is displayed in the same way as the movable body. Unlike the pseudo-movable object display that is displayed moving, this is an image (display) that imitates only the effect part 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable object 32 . For example, at the production start timing, it is displayed at the production display position corresponding to the production position of the mounted movable body 32 from the beginning without moving display.

(development suggestion production)
The development suggestive effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position. After that, light is emitted based on detection of a repeated operation of the push button 31B by the player during an operation valid period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is valid. When the display portions Z208A to Z208E change to the light-emitting display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310, which will be described later, that is, the development effect B may be executed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image simulating the push button 31B, etc.) that promotes the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B in the operation effective period in which the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion effect is valid. is not displayed on the image display device 5, and the button LED 62 (see FIG. 19-2) built into the push button 31B is illuminated to promote repeated pressing of the push button 31B. However, the image display device 5 may display an operation prompting display that encourages repeated pressing of the push button 31B during the valid period of operation.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is a character image Z310 related to the model that is displayed in the first specific display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act on) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 19-26(A) to (J) and Figure 19-27(A)).

More specifically, when the pattern PS-1 is determined in the step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the pattern PS-1 is determined. When the pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change in order from white to blue in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and when the pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E. changes in the order of white→blue→green in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B. When the pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Changes from green to red. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E having the highest degree of expectation for execution of the development effect B is red.

In addition, the emission color and the change pattern of the emission color can be changed in various ways. For example, the emission color may be changed from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the emission display color may be a color other than white from the beginning. . In addition, the lighting number of the plurality of light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is increased in accordance with the continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B, so that the execution expectation of the development effect B is higher when the lighting number is larger than when the lighting number is small. may Further, the degree of expectation may differ depending on the color of emitted light and the number of emitted lights.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, if the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period or the continuous pressing operation amount is small, even if any of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined, has exemplified a mode in which the light emitting display color does not change according to each of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous pressing operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the operation valid period. Alternatively, even if the amount of continuous hit operation is small, the light emitting display color may be changed according to the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 at the timing when the valid operation period expires.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color corresponding to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. there is

Note that the character image Z310 of different types may be displayed according to the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period expires. Further, even if the light emission display color of the light emission display portions Z208A to Z208E does not change even though one of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined as described above, the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 A character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E) may be displayed. Further, the light emission display color of the light emission display portions Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development production B)
Developing effect B is that the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing a determined effect (game Advantageous content for the user) is notified (see FIG. 19-27 (D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (Fig. 19-27 ( D) to (F)).

Further, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the reach title is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the display of the image is started, the variable display result becomes a big win (controlled to a big win game state). ) is suggested.

Specifically, when execution is determined in the development effect B type determination processing of step 241 SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing. By moving and displaying, the development to strong super reach is announced (see FIG. 19-27(D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. is displayed in a ready state manner to announce the development to strong super reach (see FIG. 19-27(C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development effect B type determination processing, the ready-to-reach title image Z51 is displayed in a state of preparation without moving and displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, and the strong super-reach is achieved. It is to determine the effect pattern that informs the development of.

(Decision production)
The final effect is an effect to settle the battle confrontation between the ally character and the enemy character executed in the super ready-to-win effect, and notify whether or not the game will be controlled to the jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after displaying the ally character giving the final blow to the enemy character, a display prompting the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is displayed. or at the timing when the effective operation period ends without detection of the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the enemy character Either a big hit confirmation notification that the player wins the battle by defeating the player or a failure confirmation notification that the mounted movable body 32 is knocked down by an enemy character without being moved from the original position to the performance position and loses the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the result of the variable display is a failure, and are patterns in which a confirmation notification is made that the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle. KV-2 is selected when the result of the variable display is a big win, and is a pattern in which a confirmation of the big win is announced in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing at which the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. Then, a vibration performance is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

Further, when execution of the pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination processing of step 241 SGS282 to be described later, the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounting movable body 32 falls. , a big hit is announced, and after returning from the performance position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the decoration pattern is variable. Display resumes. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a big hit (FIG. 19). -29(E)-(G), see FIGS. 19-30(A)-(F)).

On the other hand, when the execution of pattern KB-1 or KV-1 is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not move from the origin position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and an effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. A failure determination notification is performed, and the variable display result is a failure (see FIGS. 19-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, about the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the execution status of the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200. , with reference to FIGS. 19-11. FIG. 19-11 is a diagram showing the degree of expectation for a big hit according to the execution status of the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 19-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of symbols based on the variation patterns of super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed. Pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above description, the degree of expectation for a big hit is set to increase in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C<pattern D. That is, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. When the development performance A is not executed and the development performance B is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is higher. Further, the rate of control to the big win game state when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed is higher than the case where the development performance A is executed without the development performance B being executed (big win expectation). is high. In addition, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

19-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is ON (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer number "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure reservation storage in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the first special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer numbers "1-3" and stored.

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off at step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y ), various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure reservation storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number It is shifted upward by minutes (step 241SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no place to shift them.

Specifically, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-0" Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1", Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2 special figure reservation storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-2", and the second special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the reserved storage are shifted so as to be associated with the buffer number "2-3" and stored.

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop design) of the decorative design is determined according to the data stored in the display result designating command storage area (that is, the received display result designating command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop pattern of the decorative pattern corresponding to the display result specified by the display result specifying command, and stores the data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. do.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120, for example, determines that the three symbols are "7" as the stop symbols. ”Determines a combination of matching decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", (combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", "999"). In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable big hit C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the small hit. decide from within. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probability variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, select a decorative pattern in which three patterns are even-numbered patterns as the stop pattern. Determine the combination (jackpot pattern). Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to the small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778" which are the same chance numbers as the probability variable big hit C. decide from within. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to the loss, the decorative symbols in which the three symbols are not aligned as the stop symbols are combinations other than the above-described chance symbols. (losing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to a numerical value matching the extracted random number.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277), and when it is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277 ;Y), executing the notice effect type determination processing shown in FIGS. 21(A) is executed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the development effect A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When it is not the normal reach fluctuation pattern or the super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 19-19, in the announcement effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, since the target of the notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big hit A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or loses. Which one is specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach can be specified by the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of the variable probability big win C may be excluded from the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the gaming state is the low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is the low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the notice effect is extracted, and the effect pattern of the notice effect A is determined using the notice effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 19-20(A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in the low base state, that is, if it is in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), the random number for determining the notice effect is extracted, and the table B for determining the notice effect type shown in FIG. 19-20(B) is extracted. is used to determine the effect pattern of the advance notice effect B (step 241SGS304).

As shown in FIG. 19-20(A), in the advance notice effect A type determination table, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" For each, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, if super reach is lost, if normal reach is lost A different judgment value is assigned to each of the above so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 19-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2". , “Pattern PYA-3” is assigned 50 determination values, and “Pattern PYA-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach out, 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2". , “Pattern PYA-3” are assigned 15 determination values, and “Pattern PYA-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is out of normal reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-1", and 10 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display becomes a probability variable jackpot, the "pattern PYA-4" is determined at the highest rate, and when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, the "pattern "PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and "Pattern PYA-1" is determined at the highest rate when super reach or normal reach is lost. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest expectation for a big hit, and "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1" have the lowest expectations for a big hit. Become. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in FIG. 19-20(B), in the announcement effect B type determination table, "pattern PYB-1", "pattern PYB-2", "pattern PYB-3", and "pattern PYB-4" For each, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, if super reach is lost, if normal reach is lost are assigned different determination values so as to have the number of determination values shown in FIG. 19-20(B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2". , “pattern PYB-3” is assigned 50 determination values, and “pattern PYB-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach out, 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2". , “pattern PYB-3” is assigned 15 determination values, and “pattern PYB-4” is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is out of normal reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", and 10 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4".

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the probability variable jackpot is determined in the variable display, the "pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate, and when the non-probability variable jackpot is determined, the "pattern PYB-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when super reach or normal reach is lost, "pattern PYB-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "pattern PYB-4" has the highest degree of expectation for a big hit, and "pattern PYB-3"> "pattern PYB-3"> "pattern PYB-2"> "pattern PYB-1" has the lowest degree of expectation for a big hit in that order. Become. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In the characterizing portion 241SG, the table for determining the advance notice effect A type for the low base state and the table for deciding the advance notice effect B type for the high base state are exemplified as having the same decision ratio for each pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may differ between the table for determining the type of advance notice effect A and the table for determining the type of notice effect B.

Returning to FIG. 19-19, in step 241SGS305, the advance notice effect type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306 to set the period until the start of the effect to the announcement effect start waiting timer (step 241SGS306), and terminates the processing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-21, in the development effect A type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic portion 241SG, since the target of the development effect A is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big win A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or It suffices to specify by the variable display result designation command whether it is a loss or not, and to specify by the fluctuation pattern designation command whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of the probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the object of the development effect A.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the development effect type determination random number, and determines the effect pattern of the development effect A using the development effect A type determination table shown in FIG. ).

As shown in FIG. 19-21(B), in the development effect A type determination table, the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, any of the probability variable jackpot C), when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, when super reach is lost, when normal reach is lost, each different judgment value is the judgment shown in FIG. 19-21 (B) It is assigned to be a value number.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" when the variable display result is out of normal reach. That is, when the normal reach is lost, the development effect A is not executed because the weak super reach effect is not developed.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "execution" is determined at the highest percentage, and if the super reach or normal reach is lost "Non-execution" is determined with the highest percentage. That is, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher when the development effect A is executed than when it is not executed. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 19-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the development effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, sets the period until the start of the development effect A start waiting timer (step 241SGS314), and terminates the processing.

Returning to FIG. 19-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variation pattern in the variable display is a super reach variation pattern (step 241 SGS279), and super reach variation If it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), the development suggestive effect type determination processing shown in FIG. 241SGS280), the development performance B type determination processing shown in FIG. A) is performed to determine the effect pattern (effect type) of the determined effect in the variable display by executing the determination process for determining effect B type shown in A) (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), it progresses to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 19-22(A), the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern in the development suggestive effect type determination process (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, since the target of the notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big hit A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or loses. Which one is specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach can be specified by the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of the variable probability big win C may be excluded from the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the development-suggestion effect, and determines the effect pattern of the development-suggestion effect using the table for determining the type of development-suggestion effect shown in FIG. ).

As shown in FIG. 19-22(B), in the development suggestion production type determination table, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" For each, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (any of probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, if super reach is lost, if normal reach is lost A different judgment value is assigned to each of the above so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 19-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2". 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", and 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-2". , "pattern PS-3" is assigned 50 determination values, and "pattern PS-4" is assigned 30 determination values. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach out, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2". , "Pattern PS-3" is assigned 15 determination values, and "Pattern PS-4" is assigned 5 determination values.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, when the variable display becomes a probability variable jackpot, the "pattern PS-4" is determined with the highest ratio, and when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, the "pattern PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and if super reach is lost, "pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "pattern PS-4" has the highest expectation for a big hit, and "pattern PS-4" > "pattern PS-3" > "pattern PS-2" > "pattern PS-1" has the lowest expectations for a big hit. Become. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 19-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestive effect type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, a period until the start of the effect is set in the development suggestion effect start waiting timer (step 241SGS324), and the processing is terminated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-23(A), in the development effect B type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for designating a variable display result (loss, variable probability big win A, variable probability big win B, variable probability big win C, non-variable probability big win, small win) transmitted from the main substrate 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Further, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, since the target of the notice effect is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a big hit (variable big hit A, big win B, big win C, non-variable big win) or loses. Which one is specified by the variable display result specification command, and whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach can be specified by the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of the variable probability big win C may be excluded from the target of the advance notice effect.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the development effect determination random number and determines the effect pattern of the development effect B using the development effect B type determination table shown in FIG. 19-23(B) (step 241 SGS332). .

As shown in FIG. 19-23(B), in the development effect B type determination table, the variable display result is the probability variable jackpot (variable probability jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, any of the probability variable jackpot C), when it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, when super reach is lost, when normal reach is lost, each different judgment value is the judgment shown in FIG. 19-23 (B) It is assigned to be a value number.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are allocated to “execution”. . In addition, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" when the variable display result is out of super reach α. That is, when the super reach α is lost, the development effect B is not executed because the strong super reach effect is not developed.

By assigning the judgment value in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot or a non-probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "execution" is determined at the highest percentage, and if the super reach or normal reach is lost "Non-execution" is determined with the highest percentage. In other words, the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 19-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the development effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, the period until the start of the development effect B start waiting timer is set (step 241SGS334), and the processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 19-24(A), in the decided effect type determination process, the effect control CPU 120 determines the decided effect type shown in FIG. The effect pattern of the determined effect is determined using the table for determination (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined effect type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the period until the start of the effect is set in the timer for waiting for the start of the determined effect (step 241SGS343), and the processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 19-24(B), in the determination effect type determination table, the operation of the push button 31B is validated, and an operation prompting display prompting the player to single-press the push button 31B is displayed. KB-1", "Pattern KB-2", "Pattern KV-1", "Pattern KV- 2”, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot (either probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, or probability variable jackpot C), if it becomes a non-probability variable jackpot, or if the super reach is lost Different decision values are assigned so as to have the number of decision values shown in FIG. 19-24(B).

Specifically, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern KB-2", and 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern KB-2", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is super reach β/γ deviation, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1". is assigned.

By assigning the determination value in this way, when the probability variable jackpot is achieved in the variable display, the "pattern KV-1" in which the operation object is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest rate, and the non-probability variable jackpot is determined. In this case, the "pattern KB-2" in which the push button 31B is the operation target is determined at the highest ratio. ” is determined by the highest percentage. In other words, when the stick controller 31A is operated, the degree of expectation for the probability variable big hit is higher than when the push button 31B is operated. Incidentally, the determination ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this characteristic part 241SG, the random number for determining the advance effect, the random number for determining the development effect A, the random number for determining the development suggestive effect, the random number for determining the development effect B, and the random number for determining the final effect are random numbers in the range of 1 to 100. and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of determination values of these various random numbers for determining effects is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these random numbers for determining effects can be set as appropriate. should be decided. In addition, a random number counter for effect determination for generating these various random numbers for determination of effect is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for effect determination is updated for each timer interrupt in random number update processing. Further, a common random number may be used as these random numbers for determining various effects.

In addition, in this characterizing section 241SG, the mode of determining the effect pattern of various effects in the various effect type determination processing has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to determine the execution of a notice effect such as a character notice effect, a step-up notice in which the notice image changes in stages, and a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses the display area. is determined, the timing for starting the notice performance differs depending on the manner of the notice performance, so a different period corresponding to the manner of the notice performance may be set in the timer for waiting for the start of notice performance to be described later.

Returning to FIGS. 19-18, at step 241SGS283, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

The process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). there is

Next, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (image display as a component for effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 241SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the image display device 5 . It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is displayed variably according to the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern designation command one-to-one. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes image data during variable display, including image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns, into the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, the variable display of decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of super reach β will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-25 to 19-31. 19-25, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach β mainly in normal reach. 19-26, (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of effect operations in weak super reach. FIGS. 19-27, (A) to (F) are diagrams similarly showing an example of effect operation in weak super reach. 19-28, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations mainly in strong super reach. FIGS. 19-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the strong super reach effect. 19-30, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect operation after notification of the confirmation of a big hit. 19-31, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing the details of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable object display. FIGS. 19-32 are diagrams showing the relationship between the light-emitting display section and the mounted movable body LED.

Hereinafter, examples of various effect operations in the variable display period based on the variation pattern of super reach β will be described.

As shown in FIG. 19-25(A), the effect control CPU 120 variably displays decorative patterns in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β based on the occurrence of the start winning. to start. In addition, at the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, a first reserved memory number (for example, the number "2"), a second reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), and a small number corresponding to the decoration pattern A display area 5SL for displaying patterns (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative patterns.

Note that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 and the error display (not shown) indicating the error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, the small symbols, and the error display (not shown). Since the movable object display Z200 is displayed on the front side (upper layer), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 overlap, and the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, and the number of small While the visibility of the pattern and error display is prevented from deteriorating, the decorative pattern is displayed on the back side (lower layer) than the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from deteriorating due to the overlapping of the decoration patterns.

After starting the variable display, as shown in FIG. 19-25(B), when the variable display mode is the normal reach display mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decoration pattern is started.

As shown in FIG. 19-25(C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the advance notice effect A after a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set. 19-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. By light-emitting the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4), a notice effect A suggesting control to a big win game state is executed. Also, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the luminescent display color of the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E is white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208A to Z208E are displayed based on the pattern PYA-4. When the luminescent display color of Z208E is red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size is increased according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, the second By erasing the pseudo movable object display Z200, the advance notice effect A is terminated. After that, in the display area 5SR provided on the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5, the decoration pattern is reduced and displayed in a mode slightly larger than the small pattern.

Then, when it is determined not to execute the development effect A in the development effect A type determination processing of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 32 is not dropped and held at the origin position, the development notification image Z300 is displayed, and the effect image Z61A is displayed around it to notify that the weak super reach performance will develop. Further, when execution of development effect A is determined, as shown in FIG. 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it to notify development of weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the mounting movable body 32 is executed as the development effect A, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit game state is higher than when it is not executed, but the development effect A (mounting movable body 32 Even if it is decided not to execute the fall), by displaying the development notification image Z300, it is possible to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 19-26(A), the effect control CPU 120 starts the weak super ready-to-win effect by displaying the character image Z310 after the execution period of the development effect A ends, and also starts the second pseudo After the movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position, and the development suggestive effect is started (see FIG. 19-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed such that a portion thereof overlaps the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved to the first specific effect display position as a development suggestive effect, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit. , to facilitate the operation of push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-moving body display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to PS-4) is determined in step 241SGS280 development suggestion performance type determination processing, as shown in FIG. The effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the continuous hit operation (the number of detections of the operation), and the light emission display color of the light emission display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time elapses. Suggest that B is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 19-26(E), even after the operation effective period ends, the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E are maintained, and the background image is darkened for blackout display. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E when the operation effective period ends is displayed above the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, and the character image Z310 is displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasis (see FIG. 19-26(F)), the character image Z310 is once erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 19-26(G)), and then After the character image Z310 of the size is displayed (see FIG. 19-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 19-26(I)). A character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 19-26(J)).

In FIGS. 19-26(E) to (J), it is preferable that the light emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E continue to emit light, but the effect image Z62 is not displayed, in consideration of the appearance of the presentation.

In this way, the character image Z310 of the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E is displayed in such a manner that it gradually increases in size from the back side to the front side of the screen, and the character images Z310 of small size, medium size, and large size are displayed. When doing so, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 19-26(J) in FIG. 19-27, the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position. By overlapping at least a part of Z200 on the front side and making it possible to visually recognize the second pseudo movable body display Z200 through the overlapping area, the expectation for the execution of the development effect B is more suitable. can be aroused by

In addition, since the character image Z310 is displayed with priority over the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. While diverting the player's attention, the display of the character image Z310 can favorably suggest that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, although the character image Z310 was displayed in a manner of gradually increasing in size, at least the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was displayed in an area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. You may display so that it overlaps on the near side of a part. Further, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestive image so as to overlap at least a part of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on the near side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-27(A), the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the second position while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. 1 Delete (hide) without moving to a specific initial display position. Specifically, as an erasing display for emphasizing that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 has been erased, it is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out. Thereafter, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being hidden in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the characterizing part 241SG, the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. Although the mode of erasing (hiding) without moving and displaying from the display position to the first specific initial display position has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, as shown in FIG. 19-26 (F). When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the display, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed as a first specific effect display while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. Z200 may be faded out, moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and erased (hidden).

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-27(B), at the start timing of the development effect B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if non-execution of development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination processing of step 241SGS281, as shown in FIG. It is erased without moving from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). By doing so, it is notified that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 19-27(D), when execution of the development effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, it is notified that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display portion Z207 including the luminescent display portions Z208A to Z208E is displayed. It is displayed in a manner rotated clockwise when viewed from the front. Also, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position.

19-27(D), the luminous display colors of the luminous display parts Z208A to Z208E are different from the development suggestion production, and do not suggest the degree of expectation for a big hit, but are displayed on the image display device 5 as an image of a weak reach production. The light emission display color is set according to the color of the effect image Z65, etc., which is being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-27(E), a reach title image Z51, which will be described later, is displayed in a predetermined mode (for example, a mode at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). As shown in 27(F), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is erased (hidden) from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-28 (A), when the variable display mode is the super ready-to-win display mode, the effect control CPU 120 has a reach title indicating the type of super ready-to-win effect and a reach title indicating the degree of expectation for a big hit. A title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super ready-to-win effect has developed. Next, a super ready-to-win effect (for example, an effect of displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confrontation)) is started (see FIG. 19-28(B)). Then, when the pattern KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the determination effect type determination processing of step 241 SGS 282 at the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the super reach display mode was set, that is, the operation target is the push button. 31B, as shown in FIG. 19-28(C), an operation prompting image Z53 for prompting the player to press the push button 31B is displayed. On the other hand, when patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the determined effect type determination processing of step 241SGS282, that is, when the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 19-28(D) , an operation prompting image Z54 for prompting the player to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed.

The timing at which the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected in the operation effective period during which the operation prompting display is displayed, or the push At the timing when the operation valid period expires without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a big hit, as shown in FIG. is dropped from the origin position to the performance position on the front side of the display area, and an effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, according to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is lit in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color). light up.

Note that the effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters. is not limited to, and the effect image may have a mode different from that of the effect image Z71. For example, only a portion of the glass cracks and scatters as fragments, and the remaining portion is displayed in such a manner that the mounted movable body 32 is displayed overlapping the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in a situation where it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to grasp what has happened after taking some time.

Also in the effect image Z55, as in the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner has the mounting movable body 32 arranged on the front side of the image display device 5. Since the positional relationship between the mounting movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer by displaying a part of the image in reflection, it is possible to realize a display with a more three-dimensional effect.

After that, after moving the mounting movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. , As shown in FIG. 19-29 (G), the combination of the big win symbols is temporarily stopped to inform the determination of the big win. Even if the combination of big winning symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-30(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo movable image. The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-30(B), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D are displayed in the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. In addition, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, it is the same as when the mounting movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 19-29 (E). Then, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light-emitting display section Z108A is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow colors).

Here, the details of the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 described in FIGS. 19-30 (A) and (B) are shown in FIGS. explain.

As shown in FIG. 19-31(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays, in the display area of the image display device 5, an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing a state in which the glass cracks and a plurality of glass fragments scatter. At the same time, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Note that the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a part thereof can be visually recognized below the mounting movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-31(B), when displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing glass fragments are increased from the state shown in -31(A), and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed on the front side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first effect display position, the glass fragment is more likely than the state shown in FIG. The amount and movement display speed of the image Z71A showing .

In this manner, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is displayed as the first initial display of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 according to the movement display of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100. position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and only the image Z71A showing the broken glass in the effect image Z71 is moved from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. By displaying, it is possible not only to create a three-dimensional effect by the image Z71A that scatters around, but also to make the first pseudo movable object display Z100 look like a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 19-31(C), the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 can be seen through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 19-31(D), one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 displays the first pseudo-moving body display By displaying a part of Z100 in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a more stereoscopic display can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-31(D), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, and then moves the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D to the first effect display. The state is changed to the second effect display state, and the light emission of the mounting movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at substantially the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-32, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and then causes the light-emitting display section Z108A to move to the first period ta1-ta2 ( For example, after luminous display for 33 ms), a flashing display pattern that is not displayed for a second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33 ms) is displayed at the first effect display position. While repeating ta1 to ta4 multiple times, the mounted movable body LED 208 is lit for a first corresponding period (eg, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then a second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (eg, 40ms) is repeated multiple times over the performance periods ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by performing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same cycle, it is possible to make the presentation more suitable. In the first period ta1 to ta2, it is difficult to precisely match (synchronize) the time (eg, 33 ms) during which the light emitting display section Z108A is illuminated and the time (eg, 30 ms) during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated. Even in such a case, for example, by making the turn-off period of the mounting movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the difference between the light emission display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounting movable body LED 208 increases with the passage of time. can be prevented.

Further, during the presentation periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration presentation may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, it is possible to make the performance more lively. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emitting display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED208.

Returning to FIG. 19-30(C), the effect control CPU 120 restores the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second effect display state to the first effect display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative pattern. , After temporary stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, as shown in FIG. As shown in E), it is erased after moving and displaying to the first effect display position. Then, the combination of the fixed decorative symbols is stop-displayed, and the small symbols are also stop-displayed in combination with the big winning patterns.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounting movable body 32 and performing the notification of the determination of the big win, by executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the game state is controlled to the big win game state. can be suitably realized by the player.

Returning to FIGS. 19-29, during the operation effective period during which the operation prompting display is displayed, a single push operation of the push button 31B (a detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (a detection signal from the stick controller 31A) 19-29 when the variable display result is wrong at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or when the operation valid period ends without detecting the single-pressing operation of the push button 31B or the single-pulling operation of the stick controller 31A. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed without executing the movable body effect in which the mounting movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area, As shown in FIG. 19-29(I), after displaying an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character, as shown in FIG. A stop display is performed to notify that the deviation is confirmed. In addition, in synchronization with the stop display of the combination of the winning symbols, the small symbols are stop-displayed with the combination of the losing symbols.

For example, if the push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and if the push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period, there will be a difference in the length of time afterward. The difference in scale caused by 1. 2. period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the design is determined; 2. display period of images Z55 to Z58; It may be absorbed by extending or shortening any period of the rendering period of the movable body rendering.

(Example of Super Reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the effect operation of super reach γ will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-33 to 19-34. 19-33, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ. 19-34, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an effect operation example of the advance notice effect B in super reach γ.

In the following, an example of the effect operation of the notice effect B executed in the normal reach effect in the variation pattern of the super reach γ will be explained, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach effect is the same as that of the super reach β. Therefore, the explanation is omitted. Incidentally, the super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the game state is the high base state.

As shown in FIG. 19-33(A), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-1 is determined in step 241SGS278B in the process of determining the type of the effect for the effect, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect that the normal ready-to-win display mode is set to the normal ready-to-win display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second intermediate effect display position (see FIG. 19-33 (B)), a big hit is achieved. A notice performance B suggesting control to a game state is executed. Also, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative design variably displayed in the decorative design display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position, so that it is variable in the decorative design display area 5L. Visual recognition of the displayed decoration pattern becomes difficult.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19-33(C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non indicate.

As shown in FIG. 19-33(D), when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the advance notice effect type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the effect control CPU 120 performs the advance notice that a predetermined time has passed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 19-33 (E)), a big hit is achieved. A notice performance B suggesting control to a game state is executed. Also, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed to the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific effect display position, and is variable in the decorative pattern display area 5C. Visual recognition of the displayed decoration pattern becomes difficult.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19-33(F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (non indicate.

As shown in FIG. 19-34(A), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the step 241SGS278B in the advance notice effect type determination process, the notice that a predetermined time has passed since the normal ready-to-win display mode was set. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the first effect display position (see FIG. 19-34 (B)), the jackpot game state is entered. Executes the advance notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed. Also, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable object display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative design displayed in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position, so that the decorative design display area 5L is displayed. , 5C, and 5R, it becomes difficult to see some decorative patterns.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first effect display position to the first initial display position without moving and displaying it, as shown in FIG. 19-34(C). do.

As shown in FIG. 19-34(D), the effect control CPU 120, when the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the step 241SGS278B in the advance notice effect type determination process, the notice that a predetermined time has passed since the normal ready-to-win display mode was set. At the start timing of the effect B, after displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the second initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second effect display position (see FIG. 19-34 (E)), the jackpot game state is entered. Executes the advance notice effect B suggesting that the control is performed. Also, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable object display Z100 moved and displayed to the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative design displayed variably in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the decorative design display area 5L , 5C, and 5R, it becomes difficult to see some decorative patterns.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second effect display position to the second initial display position without moving and displaying it, as shown in FIG. 19-34(F). do.

(Pseudo movable object display and movable object)
Next, pseudo-movable object display and movable objects will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-35 to 19-40. FIGS. 19-35 are explanatory diagrams for comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIGS. 19-36 are explanatory diagrams for similarly comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIGS. 19-37 are explanatory diagrams for similarly comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIGS. 19-38 are explanatory diagrams for similarly comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. FIGS. 19-39 are explanatory diagrams for similarly comparing the pseudo movable object display and the non-mounted movable object. 19-40 are explanatory diagrams for comparing the first pseudo-moving object display and the second pseudo-moving object display.

As shown in FIG. 19-35, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is a first non-movable object that differs from the mounted movable object 32 in form, weight, driving mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 19-14(B). Although this is a pseudo-movable object display simulating the mounted movable object M100, both the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable object 32 are substantially the same positions above the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position. , and the effect positions of the mounted movable body 32 are both located below the first initial display position and the origin position. The downward direction is common to the direction of movement from the position to the effect position. In other words, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position above the display area of the image display device 5 or the origin position.

19-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is longer than the moving distance L1 to (L2>L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 19-35 (A′) to (C′), the mounting movable body 32 falls (moves) by its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 19-35(A) to (C), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is shifted from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first effect display. It takes about 100 ms to move and display to the position. In other words, the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is longer than the movement display distance of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. is also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 imitating the first non-mountable movable object M100 can be mounted and movable as a structure capable of moving in the same direction (for example, downward direction) as the first non-mountable movable object M100. In the case where it is possible to move and display in the same direction from substantially the same position as the body 32, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is the movement display of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement from the origin position to the performance position faster than the movement, it is possible to perform performance with impact faster than the movement of the mounting movable body 32 actually mounted, thereby giving surprise to the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first origin position to the first rendering position below the first origin position. Occasionally, the mechanism part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the moving body M106 and the downward movement is restricted, thereby stopping the moving body M106. is displayed in imitation of the first non-mounting movable body M100 on which is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 (A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and displays the first effect display position. When stop-displaying at the performance display position, a reaction motion display (rebound display) of a specific amount of movement is performed.

More specifically, the first non-installed movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the effect part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first effect position, the mechanism part M100B is moved to the moving body M106. Since the mechanism portion M100B comes into contact with the upper portion of the , the downward movement is regulated, the mechanism portion M100B generates a recoil action due to the vibration before the effect portion M100A.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after performing the reaction movement display of the mechanism part M100B , as shown in FIG. 19-36 (B2), the recoil motion display of the effect section M100A is performed. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 simulating the first non-mounting movable body M100 different from the mounting movable body 32 is made more realistic (for example, the display simulating the mounting movable body 32 is different modes).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-36 (C′) and (D′), the mounting movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the effect section 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and moves to the effect position. At this time, the mechanical portion 32B abuts on the upper portions of the left and right moving bodies 206 to restrict downward movement, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the final effect will be described.

19-28 to 19-30, the effect control CPU 120 performs a movable body effect to drop the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position during the execution period of the determined effect (ta0 to ta10). After execution and notification of the determination of the big hit, it is possible to execute a pseudo movable body display in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 19-37(A), the effect control CPU 120 starts the determined effect at the timing ta0, and then allows the player to operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the operation valid period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position during a period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) between timings ta1 and ta2, and then performs a recoil motion during a period between timings ta2 and ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

After that, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the performance position to the origin position, and the determination of the big hit is notified. Here, a period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) between timings ta4 and ta5 during which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is a period between timings ta1 and ta2 during which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Longer than TL1 (eg, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, in the performance using the mounting movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounting movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to the detection of the player's operation, the game is played by dropping the mounting movable body 32 quickly by its own weight. While impact can be given to a person, damage to the mounted movable body 32 due to the impact can be suppressed by moving the mounted movable body 32 slowly from the performance position to the origin position.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position at timing ta6 after a predetermined time has passed since the big hit confirmation notification, and the period TL2 of timing ta6 to ta7 (for example After moving and displaying from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in about 100 ms), a recoil action display is performed in a period of timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is the period ta9 to ta10, in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to the first position. It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, approximately 100 ms) between timings ta6 and ta7 for moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is the same as the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect display. Slower than the speed when moving and displaying to the position.

Thus, in the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is more likely than the moving display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. The first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner by speeding it up in the same manner as the mounted movable object 32. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19-37(B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the amount of movement L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the rendering position shows that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounting movable body 32 per unit time TL2. That is, the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounting movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can provide an impact effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, so that the player can be surprised.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-37(C), the amount of movement of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves and displays from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 6 times) of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 4 times) of the mounted movable body 32 . By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying in an exaggerated mode the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the first non-mounted movable body The movement display distance L2 from the first origin position of M100 to the first effect display position is the same, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is It is shorter than the period TL10 for moving the first non-mounting movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position (TL2<TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from one origin position to the first effect position. That is, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement display of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect position. is also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impact effect that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, so that the player can be surprised.

Also, as shown in FIG. 19-38(C), the movement amount of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display performed when the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, and the movement amount L11 of the first non-mounting movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first It is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil action display performed when moving and displaying to the performance position. Further, the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 6 times) of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the number of recoil motion display times (eg, 4 times) of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can simulate the effects of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. In addition, by displaying the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounting movable body 32 moves to the performance position in an exaggerated manner, the game can be played. It is possible to provide a production that leaves an impression on people.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined amount of movement in the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific amount of movement in the recoil motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is Although the comparison was made between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, it is also possible to compare the second and subsequent recoil actions with the recoil action display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the recoil action. It may be a comparison with a displayed total or an average moving amount.

In addition, the recoil action is an action of jumping upward due to the recoil when the movable body stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined portion of the movable body due to the recoil. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-39(A), when the mounting movable body 32 is moved from the rendering position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounting movable body M100 is moved from the first rendering position to the first origin position, In this case, since the driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, the effect control CPU 120 changes the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from timing tb1 when the movement is started. The first period up to tb2 increases, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 decreases. That is, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until the first period elapses after starting to move, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in the second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are moved and displayed is, as shown in FIG. Since the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are unnecessary, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is performed by the first non-mounted movable body M100. or the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be performed more smoothly.

Next, movement display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-40.

As shown in FIGS. 19-40 (A) to (C), when creating a moving image in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first pseudo A first frame that is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame that is an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19-40 (A′) to (B′), when creating a moving image in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position , at least a first frame which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a first frame for displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is the input image, is required.

As described with reference to FIGS. 19-16, the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first effect display position, and the first identification of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 The movement display distance L3 from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 is longer than the movement display distance L3. While the time required to move and display to the display position is about 100 ms, it takes about 100 ms to move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. Since the difference is 800 ms, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first moving display position from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200. 1 Faster than moving display to a specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is conceivable to display in the order of the second frame shown in 40(C), the frame rate will be low and the movement will be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, one interpolated frame shown in FIG. 19-40(B) is inserted as an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. to increase the frame rate of the moving image, and move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame at the first initial display position, By performing in order of the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, natural and smooth moving display can be performed.

In this way, even when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed at high speed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without degrading the visibility.

On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 19-40 (A′), Although it is conceivable to display the frames in the order of the second frame shown in FIG. 19-40(B'), the frame rate will be low and the movement will be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position. As an input image, a plurality of interpolated frames (not shown) are inserted to increase the frame rate of the moving image to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the first identification of the second pseudo-moving object display Z200. Moving display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position is performed for each display frame in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position. The pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be moved and displayed at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 without lowering the visibility.

Further, for example, in the advance notice effect B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. Pattern PBY- in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position when PBY-4, which is displayed to move, is executed. 1, when PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the big win state (big hit expectation) is different, so that the ratio of being controlled to the big win gaming state is different. The player can be made to recognize the pseudo movable body display Z200 by the difference in speed of the moving display.

In addition, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and a pattern PBY-4 in which the second initial display position is moved to the second effect display position are displayed. is executed, patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. Since the ratio of control to the big win state (big win expectation) is higher than when is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be noticed.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the image display device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stop-displays it at the first effect display position, Although the mode of displaying the reaction motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. When the device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stops and displays it at the second effect display position, a reaction movement display ( bounce display) may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19-33(A) to (B), the image display device 5 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position. When stop-displaying at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. When moving from to the second specific effect display position and stop-displaying at the second specific effect display position, a reaction motion display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Further, in the announcement effect B, the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position is the preview effect. It is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than that of the reaction movement display performed when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 moves and displays from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the effect A. By doing so, since the advance notice effect B has a larger amount of movement than the notice effect A, it is possible to move and display in a more realistic manner.

In addition, after the pattern PBY-3 of the notice effect B or the big hit notification of the final effect, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the recoil motion display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in the pattern PBY-4 of the advance notice effect B. . By doing so, the recoil movement display becomes larger when the object is moved downward than when the object is displayed upward, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

(action/effect)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect position and the mounted movable body 32 move to the origin position The direction of moving from to the rendering position is a common downward direction, and the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. big.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounting movable body 32, thereby giving surprise to the player.
In addition, since it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to realize with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, it is possible to diversify the effects.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is shown in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a comparison of the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the speed of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison of speed with movement. In other words, as long as the movement display of the pseudo-movable object display and the speed of the movement of the movable object are compared, the type of the pseudo-movable object display and the movable object to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display simulating the first non-mounted movable body M100 that performs a reaction movement of a predetermined movement amount when moving from the first origin position to the first effect position. The control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to vertically move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and is stop-displayed at the first effect display position, it is moved by a predetermined amount. Recoil movement display (rebound display) is performed, and movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. is larger than the moving amount L13 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 makes it possible to simulate the same effect as the first non-installable movable object M100 without installing the first non-installable movable object M100. By displaying in an exaggerated mode the recoil motion that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is shown in which the reaction movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison of the movement amount of the reaction movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may be a comparison between the recoil motion display of the display Z200 and the recoil motion of the mounted movable body 32 . In other words, if it is a comparison of the amount of movement between the recoil motion display of the pseudo-movable body display and the recoil motion of the movable body, the types of the pseudo-movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

Further, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. When the development performance A is not executed and the development performance B is executed, the ratio of control to the big win game state (big win expectation) is higher.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the development effect A, which is the movable object effect, and the development effect B, which is the pseudo-movable object display effect, are executed.
Incidentally, when the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect B is executed instead of the development effect A. The ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state at a rate of 100% when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed.

In addition, advance notice effect A that foretells the possibility (expectation) of the variable display result becoming a big hit, development effect B that informs that it will develop into a strong super reach effect, and development effect B suggest the possibility of being executed. and a development suggestion effect to be executed, and in the advance notice effect A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display After moving from the position to the first specific initial display position, it is hidden, and in the development effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position, from the first specific effect display position The display is hidden without moving to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position before execution of the development effect B is hidden. When doing so, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the advance notice effect A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same manner as the movable body as a structure, so whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the development suggestive effect, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the same way as the movable body, and the character image Z310 is displayed from the first specific effect display position. Since it is not displayed without being returned to the first specific initial display position, the player's attention can be drawn to the suggestion of execution of the development effect B.例文帳に追加

In addition, it is possible to execute a decisive performance for informing whether or not to be controlled to the jackpot game state, and a development performance B for informing that the deterministic performance will be executed after developing into a strong super ready-to-win performance, and the development performance. In B, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed, after the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display is performed. The ready-to-win title image Z51, which is hidden without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and is not displayed and suggests the execution of the development effect B, is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed in the final effect, after the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, After moving and displaying from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, it is hidden.
According to this feature, prior to execution of the determination effect, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 gives priority to the display of the suggestive image rather than the moving display of the movable object as a structure. Since it is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the final effect, while in the final effect, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is the same as the movable body. Since the moving display is performed as shown in FIG.
In addition, in the characterizing section 241SG, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner in the development effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner in the fixed effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo movable object display may be moved between the specific effect and the special effect.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame at the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position in that order, and a specific image ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which an image Z71A showing a plurality of broken glass pieces due to cracked glass scatters.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without lowering the visibility, and by emphasizing the moving display with the specific image, the moving display is favorably impressed on the player. can be attached.

In addition, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position for each display frame at the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. A pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the advance notice effect B faster than the movement display from the position to the first specific effect display position; When PBY-4 is executed to move and display from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second effect display position. The ratio of control to the big win state (big win expectation) differs between when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 which are moved and displayed to the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is different. A player can be made to recognize the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 by the difference in speed of movement display.
Note that, in the advance notice effect B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and a pattern PBY-3 moving from the second initial display position to the second effect display position are displayed. and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, a big hit is achieved. The ratio of control to the state (big hit expectation) is different when the pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in the announcement effect B, the ratio of being controlled to the big hit state is 100%, and the pattern PBY- 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is 0%, or when the pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the advance notice performance B, the jackpot state is controlled. 100%, and when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed, the ratio controlled to the jackpot game state is 0%.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are display images having not only the effect display portions Z100A and Z200A but also the mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B, etc., so that the movable body operated by the driving mechanism can be displayed. While the body is more realistically expressed to enable the same movable body display effect as the movable body effect, the movement display is not only performed in the same manner as the movement of the movable body, but also the movable body is displayed. However, by making it possible to move the display in a manner that is difficult to realize due to reasons such as the complexity of the mechanism and the increase in cost, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, high-speed movement, deformation display, and return display from the performance display position to the initial display position are erased (not displayed) as a mode of movement display that is difficult to realize with a movable body. However, by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo-moving object display and unrealistically displaying the moving display, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In particular, it is possible to hide or display the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved and displayed to the effect display position at a desired timing. During the process, it is possible to avoid visibility deterioration due to other effects images being hidden, etc., and it is possible to immediately start the next effect, increasing the degree of freedom in the effect design. Play.

In addition, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil motion display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is greater than that of the first non-mounted movable body M100. is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is displayed by the first pseudo movable body display Z100. can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounting movable body M100 without mounting the , and exaggerate the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounting movable body M100 moves to the first performance position. By displaying in such a mode, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

Also, since the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is installed. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the pseudo movable body display includes effect display portions Z100A and Z200A and mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, since the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be made more realistic. can be moved and displayed in various modes.

In addition, the movement period of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the rendering position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display. Since the period does not include the first period and the second period, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 to the first effect position, the effect control CPU 120 performs light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same cycle. , the player can be made to pay attention to the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

In addition, the effect control CPU120 does not light-emitting the light-emitting display section Z108A when the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is being moved and displayed, so that the incomplete first pseudo-moving body display Z100 being moved and displayed can be seen. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 to the first effect position, the effect control CPU 120 performs light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same cycle. , the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. The pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved downward from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect in advance notice effect B. Since one pseudo-movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions by being different from the rightward movement display to the performance display position, the player can enjoy an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body. can be provided to

Further, the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then moves and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a different direction, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, Modification 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-41. 19-41, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing Modification 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, as described with reference to FIGS. 19-25, in the advance notice effect A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, A mode is illustrated in which the mounting movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position as the development performance A after the movement display is performed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 19-41(D), the movable range of the mounting movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 partly overlap, that is, the mounting that has moved to the rendering position When the movable body 32 and the second simulated movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 controls the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and the second simulated effect display Z200. When the moving display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is performed during a common period, the mounting movable body 32 overlaps the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. becomes difficult to visually recognize, it becomes easy to understand that the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is not a structure but a display object, and the attraction of the presentation is reduced.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 19-41(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After displaying (see FIG. 19-41(B)), by deleting without moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 19-41(C)), FIG. As shown in -41(D), as the development effect A, the mounting movable body 32 that has moved from the origin position to the effect position may be prevented from overlapping the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, Modification 2 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-42. 19-42, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing modification 2 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the mounting movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position are common. (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. A direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as the second modification moves between the first display position and a second display position above the first display position. , are in a common direction (for example, the vertical direction), the moving display from the first display position to the second display position of the pseudo movable body display Z402 is the movement display from the first position to the second display position of the mounted movable body 401. It should be faster than the movement to the position.

Also, the direction (downward) in which the mounting movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position and the direction (upward) in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. and may be in different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounting movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by executing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the simulated movable body display Z402 in a common period as in the present modified example 2, the mounted movable body 401 and the simulated An effect using the movable body display Z402 may be made executable.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 19-42, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure on which the character “go” is displayed. 1 position and a second position lower than the first position. and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 as Modification 2 is capable of displaying the character "body", and the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Illustrations and descriptions of the detailed driving mechanisms of the mounting movable body 401 and the mounting movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, the production control CPU 120 executes the production using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the previous notice productions A and B and the development productions A and B described above. 19-42(A), in a state where the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are waiting at the first position, as shown in FIG. 19-42(B), the pseudo movable body display After Z402 is displayed at the first display position, as shown in FIG. 19-42(C), the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved from the first display position to the second display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-42(D), the mounting movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounting movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z402 so as not to overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the simulated movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is simulated. In the closest proximity to the movable object display Z402, a quasi-union state is created in which the characters "union" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 19-42(F), the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward while maintaining the pseudo-merged state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo-movable body display Z402, and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 is displayed. By moving and displaying upward and moving the mounting movable bodies 501L and 501R to the second predetermined position, it is notified that the effect will develop due to the success of the simulated combination.

After that, as shown in FIG. 19-42(G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position or the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is set to the first display position. After the image is moved and displayed in different first specific display positions (for example, left and right positions), the image is framed out to the left and right of the screen or erased by fading out.

On the other hand, if it is decided to notify that the pseudo-union is not successful and the effect is not developed, etc., as shown in FIG. By stopping the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 while decelerating it while displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, and displaying the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, It notifies that the simulated combination is not successful and the performance is not developed. In this way, in the pseudo-movable object display Z402, it is possible to easily realize an effect that is difficult to achieve with a movable object as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, Modification 3 of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to FIGS. 19-43. 19-43, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a modified example 3 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characterizing section 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. , The present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to those capable of reciprocating display in one direction, such as the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. A) As shown in (B), after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 19-43(C), in the first effect display position, only the effect display part Z200A is vertically rotated around a rotation axis pointing in the horizontal direction. It is preferable to be able to perform various forms of movement display, such as different rotational movement display and movement display in a form of movement in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

Although the characteristic portion 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and changes and additions may be made within the scope of the present invention. is also included in the present invention.

(description of variations and applications)
In the characteristic part 241SG, the form in which the mounting movable body 32 is applied as the movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of mounting movable bodies other than the mounting movable body 32 are illustrated. A movable body may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁In addition, not only the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but also the frame-side movable body provided in the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door capable of opening and closing the game machine frame 3 may be used. A pseudo-movable body display simulating a side movable body may be movable and displayed. Also, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, as the movable bodies that were supposed to be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 but were not mounted, a form was exemplified in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 were applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable bodies other than the first non-mounting movable body M100 and the second non-mounting movable body M200 were planned to be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but are not mounted. good too.

Further, in the characterizing section 241SG, when erasing the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving body display Z200, the embodiment is exemplified in which they are hidden by gradual fading out. It is not limited to this, and an effect image may be displayed to emphasize the deletion, or deletion may be performed by a method other than these.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounting movable body 32 to the effect position is the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. , and when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays, the common effect image Z71 in which the glass cracks and the glass fragments scatter is displayed. Although the mode of outputting sound effects has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. An effect image that is longer than the movement display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and has different modes when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. A different sound effect may be output along with the display. By doing so, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be used to highlight the movement of the mounting movable body 32 .

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, during the variable display period of super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times, the development effect A and the fixed effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , the advance notice effect B and the fixed effect can be executed a maximum of two times, and the moving display of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 can be executed up to four times, the notice effect A, the notice effect B, the development suggestive effect, and the development effect B. Although one embodiment has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of execution times of the movement display of the movable body and the display of the pseudo-movable body may be a number other than the number of times described above.

Further, when the movable body can be moved a first number of times in one variable display period, the pseudo movable body display can be moved a second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, in one variable display period. preferable. By doing so, instead of increasing the chances of executing the movable body production too much and lowering the expectation of the big win, by increasing the opportunities of executing the pseudo-moving body display, the production is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest from decreasing.

In addition to the above effects, for example, when the symbol is promoted in a re-lottery after the big hit is announced, or during the big hit, the pseudo movable body display may be displayed in a moving manner. The movable object display may be a pseudo movable object display different from the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200.

Further, the advance notice performance A is applied as a special suggestive performance suggesting that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state, and the advanced performance B is applied as a notification performance for notifying contents advantageous to the player, so that the notification performance is executed. A development suggesting performance is applied as a prescribed performance to suggest, a decision performance is applied as a special performance for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state, and the special performance is suggested to be executed before the special performance is executed. Although the form in which the notice effect B is applied as the specific effect has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects other than the above can be applied. Moreover, although these various effects can be executed in one variable display period of super reach, the effects may be executed over a plurality of variable display periods.

In addition, the content that is advantageous to the player is, in the pachinko machine 1, pseudo-runs, big wins, small wins, reach, holding runs, chance-up effects, pre-reading notice effects, time-saving attachment loss, ceiling time-saving control, etc., which will be described later. , variable display results, controls and effects may be included. In the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winning, assist time (AT) winning, replay time (RT) winning, bonus winning, and the like may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 are turned on. By lowering the luminance or turning off the light, the display of the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 are made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 are displayed. is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on so that the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be played. can distract a person.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, while the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 can be adjusted by the player's operation, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be adjusted. It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting display section Z108A and the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 be disabled by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo movable body display from being spoiled or becoming unnoticeable.

Further, in the characterizing portion 241SG, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden in the development suggestive effect, the display area including the first specific effect display position Although the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image, the present invention is not limited to this. Images other than character images (for example, images simulating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used, if any.

In addition, in the characterizing part 241SG, in the development effect B, the ready-to-win title image Z51 is displayed in the mode at the start of display as a suggestive image suggesting execution of the final effect, but the present invention is limited to this. However, as long as the suggestive image suggests the execution of the determined effect, an image other than the reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in the strong super reach effect or determined effect) may be used. .

Further, in the characterizing section 241SG, the first pseudo-moving object display Z100 and the second pseudo-moving object display Z200 are displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of pseudo movable object displays may be moved and displayed during a common period. In this case, for example, the movement displayable range of the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 and the movement displayable range of the second pseudo-moving body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo-moving body display Z100 is displayed in the overlap region. and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, one of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a display layer closer to the viewer than the other. Since it is possible to make the player aware of the front-rear positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic performance.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, consideration is given to the fact that the mechanism display portions Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, in the display area of the image display device 5, a mounting movable body, a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion where the display of the mechanism display part of the pseudo movable body display starts. The part where the display of the mechanism display part of the pseudo movable body display is started by moving the body may be made difficult to see.

In addition, in the characterizing portion 241SG, the display result of the variable display includes "time saving". Clear processing to clear the counter and buffer, control to the jackpot game state, or set the display result to a time-saving loss) from the time when the variable display is a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times, etc.) ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute the ceiling time-saving control to control to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot game state. In addition, the internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is established, and the number of times of time saving in the time saving state by the ceiling time saving control (for example, 900 times) is the number of times of time saving in the normal time saving state (for example, 100 times). can be different.

When the ceiling time saving control as described above is executed and the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specified number of times without the predetermined condition being satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second A movement display of a pseudo-moving body display such as the pseudo-moving body display Z200 may be executable. In this way, it may be possible to execute the movement display of the pseudo movable body display in each notification such as the notification of the big hit, the notification of the loss with the time saving, the notification of the ceiling time saving control, etc. In each notification, the type of the pseudo movable body display and the movement display Modes and the like may be changed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is exemplified to move and display as a notification of a big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is a small hit or time saving. In the case of losing or when the above-described ceiling time saving control is executed, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 informs of small hits and time saving loss and ceiling time saving control On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a big hit, the movement of the mounting movable body 32 may be used to notify the big win.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a big hit, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify. You may make it the aspect differ. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or a loss with a time saving, and when the display result of the variable display is a big hit, the pseudo-moving body display is used to notify. It can be different.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, as a pachinko game machine, a so-called one type of pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a so-called 1 type 2 type game machine that can be controlled to a big win game state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of the big win game, and the game performance can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 or the like is exemplified as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. While the number of balls enclosed in a circulative manner inside the machine and lent out in response to a player's request for lending and the number of prize balls given according to winning are added, the number of game balls used in the game is increased. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the amount is subtracted and stored. Since scores and points are given to the player instead of game balls in these enclosed type game machines, the given scores and points correspond to game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is used as an example of a gaming machine. In addition, one game is completed by deriving a variable display result to a variable display device capable of variable display of a plurality of types of individually identifiable symbols, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines in which prizes can be generated.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to enclosed gaming machines, slot machines, etc., in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Also, the gaming machine capable of playing a game is at least one that performs a game, and is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and may be a general gaming machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Pachinko machine 2... Game board 3... Frame for game machine 4A, 4B... Special symbol display device 5... Image display device 6A... Winning ball device 6B... Variable winning ball device 7... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R... Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Effect control board 13... Sound control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switch 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23...Count switch 30...Battering operation handle 31A...Stick controller 31B...Push button 32...Movable body 100...Game control microcomputer 101, 121...ROM
102, 122... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124... random number circuit 105, 125... I/O
120 ... CPU for production control
123: display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled in an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means capable of suggesting control to the advantageous state and executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different expectations depending on the effect mode;
a special image display effect executing means capable of displaying a special image;
By using the displayed special image, a special effect capable of executing a special effect of changing the suggestive effect being executed in one effect mode to a effect mode with a higher degree of expectation than the one effect mode a performance execution means;
display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo-movable object display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
a production executing means capable of executing production;
with
The production executing means is
a pseudo-moving object display performance for moving and displaying the pseudo-moving object display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect for moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable and
When the effect execution means executes the movable body effect and the pseudo-movable object display effect in a predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the movable body effect in the predetermined period, and the pseudo movable object effect is not executed in the predetermined period. The proportion of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display effect is executed,
The special effect executing means displays a special corresponding image when the suggestive effect is being executed, and executes the special effect in a manner in which the special image acts on the special corresponding image. game machine.

Images